JP7254584B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing games.

In a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, there has been proposed a technique for making it possible to obliquely transform and display an effect image according to an instruction from a display list (for example, Patent Document 1). Also proposed is a technique for a gaming machine that draws a processed image in which a plurality of deformed images generated using a reversed image are arranged (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2018-171129 A JP 2012-29947 A

With the techniques described in Patent Literatures 1 and 2, there is a risk that the player's interest in changing the image will decrease, resulting in an insufficient increase in the interest in the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances amusement in a game through appropriate image display.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine capable of executing a game,
a storage means for storing image data;
and image processing means capable of executing drawing processing using image data,
The image processing means is
normal drawing processing for drawing corresponding to image data;
a specific drawing process for changing and drawing at least the color information included in the image data,
The specific drawing process is a process of changing color information of a plurality of types of effect images displayed in a specific layer included in a plurality of layers with different priorities,
A specific effect suggesting that the player is controlled in an advantageous state can be executed during the variable display,
As the specific effect, a first specific effect with a high degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, or a second specific effect with a low degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state can be executed,
The effect pattern of the second specific effect includes a first pattern and a second pattern with different expectations of being controlled to the advantageous state,
An image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed with the first pattern and the second pattern in at least a first period of the effect period during which the second specific effect is executed,
In a second period of the effect period in which the second specific effect is executed, which is later than the first period, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the case of the first pattern, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the case of the second pattern;
execution of the specific drawing process is restricted in response to the execution of the first specific effect;
When the specific drawing process is executed in response to the execution of the second specific effect, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the specific drawing process is not executed,
As the second specific effect, it is possible to execute one of a plurality of types of predetermined effects with different expectations of being controlled to the advantageous state,
The common specific drawing process can be executed in response to any of the plurality of types of predetermined effects being executed,
Further comprising a light emitting means capable of executing a light emitting effect corresponding to the specific drawing process,
It is characterized by
(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), and has storage means for storing image data (for example, effect data) . Memory 91AK123, VRAM 91AK147, etc.) and image processing means (for example, VDP91AK132, etc.) capable of executing drawing processing using image data, and the image processing means performs normal drawing processing (for example, drawing corresponding to image data). drawing processing in response to drawing commands for normal display, etc.) and specific drawing processing (for example, drawing processing in response to drawing commands for effects, etc.) that changes and draws at least the color information included in the image data. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect, etc.) that suggests that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) during the variable display, and the specific effect is performed. The effect pattern includes a first pattern (for example, a drawing effect pattern 02AKA01) and a second pattern (for example, a drawing effect pattern 02AKA02) in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is different, and a effect period during which the specific effect is executed. Of these, at least in the first period (for example, the effect execution period D1, etc.), regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, the normal drawing process (for example, according to the drawing command at the time of the normal drawing effect) During a second period (for example, an effect execution period D2, etc.) later than the first period of the effect period during which the specific effect is executed, the first image can be displayed. When it is a pattern, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed, and when it is the second pattern, it is drawn by the specific drawing process (for example, a drawing process according to a drawing command during a specific drawing effect). Images can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game through appropriate image display.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific drawing process may be performed by drawing with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying an appropriate image.

(3) Alternatively, in the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific drawing process may convert values of color information included in the image data to draw (for example, reverse color information).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying an appropriate image.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, a light emission effect can be executed by a light emitting means in response to display of an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and In the specific effect, the light emission effect may not be executed (for example, see effect control example 02AKC01) in response to the display of the image drawn by the specific drawing process.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying an appropriate image.

(5) Alternatively, in the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, a light emitting effect is performed by the light emitting means in a normal mode. It is possible, and the light emission effect may be restricted more than the normal mode in response to the display of the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying an appropriate image.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, set to one of a plurality of set values (e.g., values from 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. Possible setting means (for example, CPU 103 that executes set value change processing S6A, etc.), and setting suggestion effect (for example, effect by effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, etc.) in which suggestion regarding setting of the setting means is performed by display of a specific mode. can be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may not be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying an appropriate image.

(7) Alternatively, in any one of the gaming machines of (1) to (5) above, one of a plurality of set values (e.g., values from 1 to 6) with different advantages for the player. setting means (for example, CPU 103 that executes set value change processing S6A, etc.) that can be set to the setting suggestion effect (for example, effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) for suggesting the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode etc.), and an image drawn by the specific drawing process may be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying an appropriate image.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7), in the second period, an effect (for example, specified by a drawing effect pattern 02AKA02) of pausing and displaying an image in the case of the second pattern drawing effects, etc.) may be executable.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying an appropriate image.

(9) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using the image data and a monochrome image in the case of the second pattern (see, for example, production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying an appropriate image.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, variable display of the identification information image (for example, decorations in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) variable display of a pattern, etc.) and variable display of a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image (for example, variable display of a small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1). can be drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, and the reduced identification information image can be drawn and displayed by the normal drawing process (for example, see FIG. 11-5).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying an appropriate image.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of operation effect determination processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the presence or absence of an operation effect and the number of times for the characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determining the number of setting suggestions related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the number of times of value notification related to the characteristic part 60AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various production|presentation based on characteristic part 60AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control board which concerns on characteristic part 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a text display process table related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; It is a figure which shows the example of text display control based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing drawing commands for effects related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of effect drawing synthesis processing related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an execution example of image processing related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an image display example related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; It is a figure which shows the contents of the ready-to-win effect and the drawing process pattern concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of drawing processing patterns related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

In addition, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win state during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative design is also called the probability variable design, and the even-numbered decorative design is also called the non-probable variable design (normal design). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

Even during the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed for informing the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. In addition, even during the small winning game state, the effect during the small winning to report the small winning game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In the power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4; Yes). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the recovery time from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it is determined that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. , the screen is displayed for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes a process to measure . Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is detected. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process process of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The process of waiting for the start of variable display in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production processing during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small-hit mid-performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the performance process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end performance. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. After that, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small winning end production process is ended.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is changed to "7", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot switch to be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as winning probability (ball-out rate), etc., and an open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Note that the setting value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the staff of the game arcade (setting value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by the staff of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed together with the main board 11 in the board case. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. . In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the frame for the game machine opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The 1st to 4th display parts of the display monitor are all composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the type of the big win during the big win game. The right hitting lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low probability high base state or a big hit game state as a time saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

8-1(A) and 8-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set to the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). is. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to using separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result determination common to the first special figure and the second special figure A table may be used.

When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 ~ Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

In each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) are special figures of "jackpot" assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/1 when the set value is 4). 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, 1/160 when the setting value is 3, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, and 1/140 when the setting value is 4. 1/120 for 5 and 1/100 for a set value of 6). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state (high probability state) than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability is 1.625 times)), and the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value , may be set to a constant value (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state will be the same value. A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state as "small winning" may be varied. The special figure display result is not limited to a form with a different probability of being determined when controlling the special figure display result as a "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure, and the special figure display result is " The probability that it is determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

FIGS. 8-2 to 8-5 show numerical ranges of hit determination values assigned to "big wins" and "minor wins" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 8-2 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 8-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state. FIG. 8-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 8-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range Only numbers within (1020-1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, numbers within the range of the common number range plus the non-common number range will be the "jackpot" assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the setting value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of big hit determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the setting value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the judgment included in a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit judgment value of 1020 The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is judged as the small hit. As a numerical range of values, a variable display result is determined.

In each display result determination table, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same) be. In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big win game state is determined is the lowest, and the value of the setting value is the lowest. Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (big hit probability: setting value 6> setting value 5> setting value 4> setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of the random number MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big win, the special symbol wins (big win). It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 8-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the configuration in which a total of six set values, ie, 1 to 6, are provided. Seven or more may be sufficient. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of a big win, the easier determination of a specific kind of big win, etc.). It may be arranged such that the smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form that does not change, but the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characteristic portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 8-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. ) and initial settings such as settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing a RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A , the process proceeds to step S3A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A, If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), set value confirmation processing (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the game machine frame is open when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off. It is the process that takes place. In the setting value change process, a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, According to the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing the temporary set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) while the game machine frame is open. This is a process performed by In the setting value confirmation process, the process of transmitting a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, the display of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall through a terminal board (not shown), and ending the display etc. according to the state of a lock switch, setting to the effect control board 12 A process of transmitting a value confirmation end notification command is performed.

It should be noted that in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the lighting of the round indicator, the first reservation indicator 25A, By starting the flashing of the second holding display 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player, a game hall staff member, or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing or setting the set value. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed). (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). As other processing, the CPU 103 determines, for example, whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by a cold start or whether it is restored to the state before the power failure (started by a hot start) depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set. ), perform processing corresponding to each (step S10A), and end the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in addresses other than the first address (F000) where the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. processing takes place. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) F003 and later of FXXX) may be cleared only.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Also, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or that the power has been restored from a power failure during setting change, A process of transmitting an error designation command according to the abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Furthermore, the first display section, second display section, third display section, and fourth display that constitute the display monitor are used to notify (error notification) that a set value abnormal error has occurred or that power has been restored from a power failure during setting change. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the sections. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.). The monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may perform error occurrence notification.

In the processing within the game control main processing, after it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A, when it is determined that the open sensor is OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being detected, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. As a result, regardless of whether or not the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed, the effect control board 12 can store the setting value in a identifiable manner when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on. can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B Notify the occurrence of an error. , the staff of the game hall or the like can recognize from both the front side and the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the electricity has recovered from the power failure during the change of the setting value. . In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or the recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value. become.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1 has a hit determination value of 1020 to 1237, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are continuous. Since it is set to be a numerical value range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range according to each setting value. It suffices to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range of up to. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

The numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided, random It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big-hit determination value (whether or not to control to the big-hit game state) multiple times. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit determination Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability variable state It is sufficient to judge no. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of determination values included in the numerical range is 655, which is about double). On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It suffices to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) that is different from the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within a numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. When it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. It should be determined whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
In the characteristic portion 60AK, the number-of-times notification effect is executed at a predetermined ratio during the execution of the variable display. In the number-of-times notification effect, the number of times the operation effect is executed is notified. The operation effects are effects in which various notices, notifications, and suggestions are made when the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is detected. The operation performance of the characteristic part 60AK includes a notice performance for notifying that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state, a value notification performance for notifying whether or not the variable probability state will be controlled after the jackpot game state is ended, and a pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加A setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in is included as an executable effect.

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop pattern and the like are determined (step 60AKS011). The final stop pattern is a fixed decorative pattern as a display result of variable display of decorative patterns, and is a variable pattern indicated by a variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 or a variable display result notification command. It can be determined based on variable display content, such as the display result of the display. A variation pattern specification command and a variable display result notification command are transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 based on the setting by the variation pattern setting processing of the special symbol process processing. The variable display contents corresponding to the display results of the variable pattern and variable display are "non-reach (losing)", "normal reach (losing)", "super reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", "probability ( jackpot)" should be included. If the variable display content is any one of "non-reach (loss)", "normal reach (loss)", and "super reach (loss)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "loss". If the variable display content is either "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". In addition, when the variable display content is "normal reach (loss)" and when the variable display content is "super reach (loss)", the variable display content is collectively referred to as "reach (loss)". When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" and when the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", the variable display content is collectively called "big hit".

If the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display state of the decorative pattern will not be in the ready-to-win state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a "failure". When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". becomes. If the variable display content is "Reach (Loss)", if the variable display content is "Normal Reach (Loss)", the "Normal" variation pattern will be used to create a reach effect, and the variable display content will be "Super Reach ( In the case of "losing)", a reach effect is executed according to the "super" variation pattern. When the variable display content is ``non-probability variation (big hit)'', the display result of the variable display is ``big hit'', and the jackpot type corresponds to ``non-probability variation'', and the game state after the end of the big win game state is shortened. state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big hit)", the display result of the variable display is "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big win game state is the variable probability state corresponding to the "variable probability" of the jackpot type. Become. When the game state is a probability variable state, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" increases, and by being easily controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state, the game is played more than the normal state or the time saving state. A game value advantageous to the player is given.

The final stop pattern is determined so that when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R have different (mismatched) decorative patterns. be. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared left finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, the determination is performed. Of the decorative symbols, the left finalized decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Next, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. It is only necessary to determine the right confirmed decorative design to be stop-displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 among the designs. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Among the symbols, the medium-determined decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

The final stop pattern is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R when the variable display content is "reach (loss)". be. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left/right determined pattern updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared left/right determined pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, determination is performed. Among the decorative patterns, the decorative patterns having the same pattern number and displayed stopped together in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc., a fixed decorative pattern Among them, the medium-determined decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to or from the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may not be a jackpot combination but be a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

The final stop pattern is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)". are determined to be the same (matching) decoration pattern. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5L, and 5L on the screen of the image display device 5, The decorative symbols having the same symbol number to be stop-displayed together in 5C and 5R may be determined. At this time, the normal pattern (for example, even It suffices if it is determined which of the decorative symbols showing odd numbers) and the probability variable patterns (for example, the decorative symbols indicating odd numbers) should be determined as the fixed decorative symbols. In the promotion performance during the big win, after a combination of decorative symbols (non-variable big win combination) that reminds the player of the big win but not the variable probability state is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, it is displayed during the big win game state or in the big win game state.例文帳に追加It is an effect that informs whether or not it will be in a probability changing state at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variable (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variable (big win)'', the fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable patterns as the fixed decoration patterns, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", in step 60AKS011, it is determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a big hit. may be broken. In the re-lottery performance, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and that control to the variable probability state is made, By variably displaying (re-varying) the decoration patterns again and stop-displaying the decoration patterns of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variation patterns, the player can be recognizably informed that the probability variation state is controlled. In some cases, the decoration symbols of the non-probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the decoration symbols are varied again in the re-lottery production, so that the control to the probability variation state may not be notified. When it is determined in step 60AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery effect.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like, operation effect determination processing is executed (step 60AKS012). By the operation effect determination process, determination and setting for executing the operation effect and the number of times notification effect are performed. Then, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step 60AKS013). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, an operation production control pattern, other notice production control patterns, and the like. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared operation effect control patterns may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the determination result of the operation effect determination process of step 60AKS012. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the operation production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be. When the production control pattern is determined, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set. (step 60AKS014). Also, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step 60AKS015). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step 60AKS013 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is set (step 60AKS016). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part corresponding to the pending number "1" (the display part at the left end) is erased (digested), and the other pending numbers "2" to The pending display in the display portion corresponding to "8" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 60AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 9-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation effect determination process executed in step 60AKS012 of the variable display start setting process. In the operation effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect permission condition is established (step 60AKS021). The effect permission condition may be determined in advance as a condition under which execution of the operation effect is permitted. For example, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP ready-to-win which is super reach is executed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command, the effect permission condition may be established. Moreover, it is good also as one of the production|presentation permission conditions that it is a high probability high base state in a probability variable state. In this way, when the ready-to-win effect of the SP ready-to-win is executed in the high-probability-high base state, the effect permission condition may be established.

In the characteristic portion 60AK, SP reach A and SP reach B are prepared in advance as reach effects of super reach. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having different effects from each other. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having a common effect mode. When the display result of the variable display is "big win", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal ready-to-win. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is higher than the ratio of executing to-win effect of SP ready-to-win A. When the display result of the variable display is "losing", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. Further, when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-A becomes higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B. According to the execution ratio of such a reach production, among the reach productions of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, the reach production of SP reach B was executed more than the case where the reach production of SP reach A was executed. In this case, the expectation of a big hit increases.

If the effect permission condition is not satisfied at step 60AKS021 (step 60AKS021; No), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the effect permission condition is established (step 60AKS021; Yes), the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined (step 60AKS022). The operation effect is executed according to whether or not it is to be executed, for example, by referring to an operation effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the operation effect execution. and the number of times of execution in the case of execution are determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining execution of the operation effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS022, the presence or absence and the number of operation effects are set to "no execution" in which no operation effect is executed, or "executed five times" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is five, and the number of times the operation effect is executed is ten times. One of "10 executions" is determined.

Based on the determination result of step 60AKS022, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "not execute" that the operation effect is not executed (step 60AKS023). If it is determined that there is no execution (step 60AKS023; Yes), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no "execution" (step 60AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" (step 60AKS024). If it is determined to be a "jackpot" (step 60AKS024; Yes), the setting suggestion number of times is determined (step 60AKS025). The number of times of setting suggestion indicates the number of times of operation effects that are executed as setting suggestion effects among a plurality of times of operation effects. In step 60AKS025, the setting suggestion frequency is determined by referring to a setting suggestion frequency determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion frequency. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of setting suggestions may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . At step 60AKS025, the setting suggestion frequency is determined to be 0 when the jackpot type is "non-probability". When the jackpot type is "probability variable", it depends on whether the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is "five times" or "ten times". Therefore, the number of setting suggestions is determined at different ratios.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS025 is 0 (step 60AKS026). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS026; No), a suggested setting pattern is determined (step 60AKS027). The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the suggested setting pattern, and for each execution of the operation presentation. Any setting suggestion pattern may be determined among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

When the determination result in step 60AKS025 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS026; Yes), or after determining the suggested setting pattern in step 60AKS027, the number of times of value reporting is determined (step 60AKS028). The number of times of value notification indicates the number of times of operation effects that are executed as value notification effects, among a plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS028, based on the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of times of value notification, the number of times of value notification is determined by referring to a table for determining the number of times of value notification, which is stored in advance and prepared in ROM 121. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of times of notification of value may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS028, the value is calculated at a different rate depending on whether the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "five times" or "ten times". The number of notifications is determined.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS028 is 0 (step 60AKS029). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS029; No), the value notification pattern is determined (step 60AKS030). The value notification pattern is determined as one of a plurality of value notification patterns based on whether the jackpot type is ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation'' for each execution number of operation effects. It should be done.

When it is determined that the display result of the variable display is not "big hit" at step 60AKS024 (step 60AKS024; No), or when the determination result at step 60AKS028 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS029; Yes), or After the value notification pattern is determined in step 60AKS030, the number of times of notice effects is set (step 60AKS031). The number of notice effects indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as notice effects among the plurality of operation effects. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the value notification effect and the setting suggestion effect are not executed, so the number of executions of the operation effect may be set as the number of advance notice effects. When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the remaining number of times after subtracting the setting suggestion number and the value notification number among the number of times of execution of the operation presentation may be set as the number of advance notice presentations. After step 60AKS031, after determining the notice effect pattern (step 60AKS032), the operation effect determination process is terminated. The notice effect pattern is determined by referring to a notice effect pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the notice effect pattern. Any one of the plurality of advance notice effect patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the announcement effect pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 9-3 shows an example of whether or not there is an operation effect and the number of times determined by step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process. At step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process, the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined, for example, at a rate corresponding to the content of the ready-to-win effect. The content of the reach performance is determined corresponding to the display result of the variable display and the variation pattern, and is "SP reach A (big hit)", "SP reach B (big hit)", "SP reach A (loss)", "SP reach". B (losing)" should be included. If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP reach A (losing)" or "SP reach B (losing)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "losing". When the content of the ready-to-win effect is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win A is executed as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is either "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-3, when the display result of the variable display is "big win", the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is five times at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is "loss". or "executed 10 times" is determined to be 10 times. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)" or "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 50/100. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 20/100. Thus, when the operation performance is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state is increased compared to when the operation performance is not executed, and the degree of expectation for the big win is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-3, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach-B is executed, the number of times of execution of the operation effect is set to 10 at a higher rate than when the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach-A is executed. It is decided to "execute 10 times". For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of "executed 10 times" is 40/100 when the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 60/100 when the number of times to execute the operation effect is 10 times. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 10/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 20/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. Of the ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win, when the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-reach B is executed than when to-win performance of SP ready-to-win A is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher. Therefore, when the number of executions of the operation performance is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of execution of the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach-B, which has a higher expectation for the big hit than the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach-A, is increased. It effectively raises people's expectations. Further, as the number of executions of the operation presentation increases, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state increases, and the degree of expectation for big win increases.

FIG. 9-4 shows an example of setting suggestion count determined by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 9-4(A) shows an example of determining the setting suggestion number in the case of "five-time execution" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 9-4(B) shows an example of determining the setting suggestion number in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times. At step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, the setting suggestion number is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the jackpot type. The jackpot types include ``non-probability variation'' when not controlled to the probability variation state and ``probability variation'' when controlled to the probability variation state according to the game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. When controlled to the variable probability state, the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" at a higher rate than when not controlled to the variable probability state, and it is easy for the player to be controlled again to the big win game state as an advantageous state. Advantageous game value is given.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-4, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", it is determined that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation". For example, in both cases of “5 times execution” and “10 times execution”, if the jackpot type is “non-probability variation”, the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 100/100. Suggestion production is not executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "Variable Probability", it is possible to determine the number of set suggestion times other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "5 times execution" and the case of "10 times execution". More specifically, in the case of "5 times execution", if the jackpot type is "probability variation", the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 70/100. 30/100. In the case of "executed 10 times", if the jackpot type is "probability variation", the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 10/100, and the decision rate of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 15/100. , the determination ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 2 is 20/100, the determination ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 3 is 25/100, and the determination rate of setting the suggested number of times to 4 is 30/100. Therefore, when the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect with the number of times of setting suggestion other than 0 is increased. In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any of 2 to 4, which is the number of setting suggestions that are not determined in the case of 5 times, and more setting suggestions. The rate at which the production is executed is increased.

In this way, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", it is possible to execute setting suggestion production at a higher rate than "non-probability variation", so it is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" In the case of "probability variation", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to a big win game state. In addition, only in the case of "probable variation", which is the most advantageous jackpot type among multiple types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is performed. become viable. Among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, within a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance as a setting suggestion performance at a predetermined rate. In the range controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type "unprobability variable" with a low advantage, a restriction may be provided as a limit that the operation performance as the setting suggestive performance is not executed. Alternatively, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, in a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance at a high rate. On the other hand, in the range controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "unprobable variation" of the jackpot type with a low degree of advantage, there is a limit as a limit that the operation production that becomes the setting suggestion production can be executed at a low rate. may

FIG. 9-5 shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this configuration example, setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. Suggestion contents and corresponding characters are determined differently according to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content is the content of the set value suggested according to the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. The corresponding character is a character indicated by an effect image displayed when the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC1, corresponding to the case where the set value is an odd number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation with odd number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH1. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, corresponding to the case where the set value is an even number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation for even number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH2. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC3, corresponding to the case where the set value is high setting (large value) and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high setting, high degree of expectation", and the corresponding character is the character CH3. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, corresponding to the case where the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more, the content of the suggestion is "the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more", and the corresponding character is the character CH4. In the setting suggesting pattern 60AKC5, corresponding to the case where the set value is determined to be the highest value of 6, the suggested content is "the highest set value is determined" and the corresponding character is the character CH5. In this way, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 makes it possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is the most advantageous for the player.

FIG. 9-6 shows an example of setting suggestion patterns determined by step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 9-6(A) shows a determination example in the case of the final operation effect in the operation effect of a plurality of times. Figure 9-6 (B1) and Figure 9-6 (B2) show an example of determination in the case of an operation effect other than the final time in multiple operation effects, and Figure 9-6 (B1) shows a setting suggestion pattern FIG. 9-6B2 is an example of determination when 60AKC4 is undetermined as a usage pattern, and FIG. 9-6B2 is an example of determination when setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has been determined as a usage pattern. In step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process, setting suggestion patterns, which are usage patterns, are determined at a rate corresponding to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 from the final operation effect to the previous operation effect. Here, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 corresponds to the final operation effect, and when the setting value is 6, the determination ratio is 5/100, and in other cases, the determination ratio is 0/100. It is impossible to decide. Therefore, when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, which suggests that the setting value is the highest in the player's advantage, is the final operation effect. , and is not executed as an operation effect other than the final time. As a result, of the first timing and the second timing at which setting suggestion effects can be executed a plurality of times, the second timing, which is later than the first timing, has a higher rate of advantage for the player than the first timing. is the highest setting value.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-6, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100 when the setting value is 2 or more corresponding to the final operation effect. Further, if the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is undetermined for the operation effects other than the final round, and if the set value is 2 or more, the determination ratio of the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100. On the other hand, if the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined for the operation effects other than the final round, the determination ratio of the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 becomes 0/100 regardless of the set value, and determination is disabled. . Therefore, when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is executed once at a predetermined ratio as one of the operation effects, and then executed again or repeatedly in the same manner. prevent it from being done. In this way, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is performed at a predetermined rate within a range where the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has not yet been executed. becomes executable.

On the other hand, in the case where the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is not executed in the range where the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been executed. A limit is set as a limit. Further, since the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed only as the final operation effect, it is executed as the final setting suggestion effect when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times. In the range where the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is performed, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed at a predetermined rate, while in the range where the setting suggestion effect is executed except for the final episode, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is not executed. Restrictions are provided as limitations. In this way, when an operation effect that is a setting-suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting-suggestion effect by the setting-suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5 is performed at a predetermined rate within the range of being executed as one setting-suggestion effect. While it can be executed, there is a limit as a limit that it becomes impossible to execute within the range where it is executed as a setting suggestion effect multiple times. When an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, among the setting suggestion effects by the plurality of setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5, the range of setting suggestion effects by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC3 is performed in the same manner. While it may be executed, within the range of the setting suggestion rendering by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5, there is a limit as a limit that it is not executed in the same mode.

FIG. 9-7 shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 9A shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "executed five times" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 9-7(B) shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation presentation is 10 times. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, the number of times of value notification is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times of execution of the operation effect and the number of setting suggestions. The setting suggestion number is determined by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process to be 0 or 1 if the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "executed 5 times", and 0 if the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "executed 10 times". to 4.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-7, the value notification frequency is determined so that the value notification effect is executed when the set suggestion frequency is other than zero. For example, in the case of "executed 5 times", if the set suggested number of times is 1, the determination ratio of the number of times of value notification to 1 is 100/100, and the value notification effect is always executed once. In the case of "execute 10 times", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0 (one of 1 to 4), the value notification number is determined to be one of 1 to 4 at a predetermined rate. More specifically, in the case of “10 executions”, if the setting suggestion number is other than 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 55/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 2 is 55/100. 20/100, the determination ratio of 3 times of value notification is 15/100, and the determination ratio of 4 times of value notification is 10/100. Therefore, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, the set value can be suggested by the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggesting performance can be executed at a predetermined ratio when controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states. In this case, it is possible to notify that a game value advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, and to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate within the range in which the operation effect as the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect as the value notification effect is not executed. There is a limit as a limit that cannot be done. In addition, the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a high rate in the range where the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect that is the value notification effect is not executed. A limit may be provided as a limit to what can be done with

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-7, the number of times of value notification is determined so as to provide a case where the value notification effect is not executed when the number of setting suggestions is zero. For example, in the case of “five times execution”, if the setting suggestion number is 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 30/100. be. In the case of "executed 10 times", if the set suggestion number is 0, the determination ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 0 is 10/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 15/100, The determination ratio of 2 times of value notification is 20/100, the determination ratio of 3 times of value notification is 25/100, and the determination ratio of 4 times of value notification is 30/100. As a result, when the operation effect is executed a plurality of times, the operation effect such as the setting suggestion effect or the value notification effect is not executed, and after the operation effect is completed, the display result of the variable display is "big hit". ” can be provided. Therefore, during the execution of the variable display, even if the number of times of execution of the operation effect reaches the number of times notified by the number of times notification effect and the execution of the operation effect ends, there is a possibility that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit". is left, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from being lost due to the end of the operation presentation.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-7, it is possible to determine the number of value notification times other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the cases of "five times execution" and "ten times execution". Then, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the number of times of value notification is set to other than 0 so that the ratio of execution of the value notification effect can be increased. For example, in the case of "executed five times", the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 1 other than 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. On the other hand, in the case of "execute 10 times", the ratio of setting suggestion counts determined to be other than 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination processing is higher than the percentage of times determined to be 0. In the case of "executed 5 times", if the setting suggestion number is 0, the ratio of the value notification number being determined to be 1 other than 0 is higher than the ratio of being determined to be 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination processing. expensive. In the case of "executed 10 times", even if the set suggestion count is 0, the rate of value notification counts determined to be other than 0 is higher than the rate of value notification counts determined to be 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. . With such a setting, in the case of "execution of 10 times", which has a larger number of executions of the operation effect than "execution of 5 times", the rate of the number of times of value notification being determined to be other than 0 increases, and the value notification effect is executed. increase the rate of In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to decide any one of 2 to 4, which is the number of times of value notification that is not determined in the case of 5 times, and more value notification is possible. What is necessary is just to make it possible to raise the ratio which production|presentation is performed.

According to steps 60AKS025 and 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, in the case of "executed 5 times", the number of times of setting suggestion and the number of times of value notification are both determined to be 0, and the ratio of neither the setting suggestion effect nor the value notification effect to be executed is high. In the case of "executed 10 times", the number of times of setting suggestion and the number of times of value notification are both determined to be other than 0, and the ratio of both the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect to be executed increases. In this way, as the number of executions of the operation effects increases, the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effects and the value notification effects may be increased. Further, when the number of executions of the operation effects is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the setting suggesting effect and the value notification effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to vary the player's expectations for the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect according to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

FIG. 9-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step 60AKS041). At this time, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update, the variable display time It should be judged that it has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 60AKS041; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 9-8, it is determined whether or not it is the number of times notification effect period (step 60AKS042). The number-of-times notification effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is determined that it is the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the number-of-times notification effect (step 60AKS043). By the control of step 60AKS043, it becomes possible to execute the number-of-times notification effect for performing notification corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

If it is determined at step 60AKS042 that it is not the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS043, it is determined whether or not it is the notice effect period (step 60AKS044). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The notice effect period corresponding to the operation effect may be determined in advance so as to be later than the number-of-times notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the advance notice effect period (step 60AKS044; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step 60AKS045). By the control of step 60AKS045, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the advance notice effect.

When it is determined that it is not the advance notice effect period at step 60AKS044 (step 60AKS044; No), or after performing the control of step 60AKS045, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046). Reach production period, for example in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, it may be determined in advance. The ready-to-win effect period may be set so as to come later than the advance notice effect period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the advance notice effect period. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step 60AKS047). By the control of step 60AKS047, the ready-to-win effect can be executed.

When it is judged that it is not the ready-to-win production period in step 60AKS046 (step 60AKS046; No), and after performing the control of step 60AKS047, it is judged whether or not it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048). The jackpot notification period may be predetermined in the production control pattern (such as the special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined at step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The big hit notification period may be set in advance so as to be later than the ready-to-win effect period. When it is determined that it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048; Yes), control is performed to execute a jackpot notification effect (step 60AKS049). By the control of step 60AKS049, it becomes possible to notify that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state in a predetermined period during execution of the variable display.

When it is determined that it is not the jackpot notification period at step 60AKS048 (step 60AKS048; No), and after performing the control at step 60AKS049, it is determined whether or not it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050). The value notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The value notification effect period may be set so as to be later than the jackpot notification period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the jackpot notification period. When it is determined that it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; Yes), control is performed to execute the value notification effect (step 60AKS051). By the control of step 60AKS051, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the value notification effect.

If it is determined at step 60AKS050 that it is not the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS051, it is determined whether or not it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052). The setting suggestion effect period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern during the big hit. The setting suggestion effect period should be set so as to be later than the value notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; Yes), control is performed to execute the setting suggestion effect (step 60AKS053). By the control of step 60AKS053, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. If it is determined in step 60AKS052 that it is not the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; No), after performing the control in step 60AKS053, for example, in the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on this, control is performed to execute effects during variable display including the variable display operation of decorative symbols (step 60AKS054), and then the process for effects during variable display is terminated.

When it is determined at step 60AKS041 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 60AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 60AKS055). At this time, if the pattern confirmation command is not received (step 60AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the pattern confirmation command is received (step 60AKS055; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, resulting in a variable display of decorative patterns. Control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) is performed (step 60AKS056). Subsequently, a predetermined time is set as a wait time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step 60AKS057). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step 60AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 9-9 shows execution periods and execution timings of various effects with respect to the characteristic portion 60AK. Among them, FIG. 9-9(A) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the mode of variable display of decorative patterns. FIG. 9-9(B) shows execution periods and execution timings of operation-related effects including number-of-times notification effects and operation effects. When the variable display is started at timing T0, it becomes a number-of-times notification effect period. During the number-of-times notification effect period, the number-of-times notification effect is executed by the control in step 60AKS043 of the effect processing during variable display.

After that, when the number-of-times notification effect period ends at timing T1, it becomes a notice effect period. During the notice effect period, the operation effect that is the notice effect can be executed by the control in step 60AKS045 of the effect process during variable display. For example, when an operation effect that is a plurality of advance notice effects is executed, each time advance notice effect included in the multiple advance notice effects, such as the first notice, the second notice, etc., is executed in order. . The notice effect period is not only the period in which the pre-reach variation is performed before the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, but also the post-reach variation after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-reach mode. part of the period may be included. By executing the operation effect as the notice effect during the notice effect period, the display result of the variable display is changed to "big hit" based on the detection of the action of the player such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example. It becomes possible to execute a performance that foretells what will happen.

In the variable display of the decorative symbols, for example, when the determined decorative symbols of the big winning combination are stopped and displayed, the big winning notification is executed at timing T2. In the effect process during variable display, when it is determined in step 60AKS048 that it is the jackpot notification period, the control in step 60AKS049 enables execution of the jackpot notification effect. At this time, it becomes a value notification performance period. During the value notification effect period, the control in step 60AKS051 of the variable display effect process enables execution of the operation effect as the value notification effect. For example, when an operation effect that is a value notification effect is executed multiple times, each value notification effect included in the value notification effect of multiple times, such as the first notification, the second notification, etc., is executed in order. executed. By executing the operation performance as the value reporting performance during the value reporting performance period, based on detection of the action of the player, such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example, after the jackpot game state is completed, the probability variable state is set. It becomes possible to execute an effect for informing whether or not to be controlled.

Subsequently, special time notification is executed at timing T3, and the setting suggestion effect period begins. During the setting suggesting effect period, the control in step 60AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display makes it possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. For example, when an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed multiple times, each setting suggestion effect included in the setting suggestion effect such as the first suggestion, the second suggestion, and so on is sequentially performed. executed. By executing the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion effect period, based on the detection of the player's action such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 It becomes possible to execute a production that makes a suggestion. After that, when the timing T4 is reached, the variable display ends and the big win starts, and the control of the big win game state is started.

In this way, when operation effects are executed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide a number-of-times notification effect period, an advance notice effect period, a value notification effect period, and a setting suggestion effect period. In the number-of-times notification effect period, a number-of-times notification effect for performing notification corresponding to the number of executions of the operation effect is executed. During the notice performance period, an operation performance serving as a notice performance for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state is executed. During the value notification effect period, an operation effect is executed as a value notification effect for informing whether or not the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In the setting suggestion effect period, an operation effect as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed. When the number of times of value notification is 0, the value notification effect period may not be provided, and when the number of times of setting suggestion is 0, the setting suggestion effect period may not be provided.

The advance notice effect period and the value notification effect period are included in the predetermined period during which the operation effect can be executed. The setting suggestion effect period is included in the specific period during which the operation effect can be executed after the lapse of the predetermined period. The value notification effect period is started when the big hit is notified at timing T2. The big-hit notification by the big-hit notification performance makes it possible to notify that it is controlled to the big-hit game state in a predetermined period. The setting suggestive effect can be executed as an operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period when the big win is reported at the timing T2.

In step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", the setting suggestion frequency is determined to be other than 0 at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", and the setting suggestion effect is performed. Feasibly determined. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change", the jackpot type is controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, A predetermined period elapses at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with the low advantage is performed when the notification of the control to the jackpot game state with the high advantage is performed by the value notification performance. In a later specific period, it becomes possible to execute the setting suggestive effect as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode.

Even when an operation performance such as a notice performance or a value notification performance is made executable in a prescribed period, it is difficult to raise a player's expectation after the prescribed period elapses when these operation performances are terminated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, it is possible to execute the setting suggestive effect as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. As expected from the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode, the performance can be diversified and the game interest can be improved.

Further, in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, only when the jackpot type is "probability variable", the setting suggestion number is determined to be other than 0, and the setting suggestion effect is determined to be executable. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, according to being controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with the highest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change". Only when the value notification performance is controlled to the jackpot game state with the highest degree of advantage, the setting suggestion performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. Become.

In general, it is difficult to further raise the player's expectation after the notification that the game is controlled to a high-advantage jackpot game state. On the other hand, the present invention makes it possible to execute the setting suggestion effect as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period, and provides a case where the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested. , even after the lapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to diversify the performance and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode.

9-10 and 9-11 show an execution example of operation effects. In this execution example, the number of executions of the operation presentation is determined to be 10 times, ie, "executed 10 times", and the number of times of value notification and the number of times of setting suggestion are both determined to be 2. Therefore, after the operation performance as the notice performance is executed six times, the notice performance period ends and the big win is announced. FIG. 9-10(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD1 when the big win notification is executed by the big win notification effect. At this time, a big hit notification effect including display of a message such as "battle win!" and display of a effect image showing a character is executed. In addition, a normal pattern representing the number "6" is displayed as a decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. As the remaining number of executions of the operation effect, an effect image indicating "remaining number of operations: 4" is also displayed. When the decoration pattern of the non-probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbols is displayed, the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "non-probability variable", giving the impression that it is not controlled to the probability variable state. , given to the player.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD2 when the value notification effect period is started. At this time, a message indicating 4, which is the remaining number of operation effects, is displayed as the executable number of the operation effects as the value notification effect. FIG. 9-10(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD3 when the first value notification effect is started. In this case, by displaying an effect image showing the push button 31B, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 9-10(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD4 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player, which is the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the jackpot type is "probability variable" is not notified, so that the probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game state A failure notification effect that gives an impression of being uncontrolled is executed. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 3” is displayed as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD5 when the second value notification effect is started. At this time, similarly to the case where the first value notification effect is started, an effect image showing the push button 31B is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. FIG. 9-10(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD6 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player, which is the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the jackpot type is "variable probability" is performed, so that the variable probability state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. A success notification effect for notifying that it is controlled is executed. In addition, as decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the normal design that indicates the number "6" is a probability variation design that indicates the number "7". changed and displayed. When the decoration pattern of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variable symbols is displayed, the big win type is controlled to the big win game state corresponding to "variable probability", and the player is informed that it is controlled to the variable probability state. becomes recognizable. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 2” is displayed as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect.

FIG. 9-10(G) shows an effect execution example 60AKD7 when the setting suggestion effect period is started. At this time, along with notification of the special time, a message is displayed that notifies 2, which is the remaining number of operation effects, as the number of executable times of the operation effects as setting suggestion effects.

FIG. 9-11(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD8 when the first setting suggestion effect is started. In this case, by displaying an effect image indicating the push button 31B together with the effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 9-11(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD9 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH2, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2. By displaying the characters CH1 to CH5 corresponding to the suggested setting patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 in order on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the advantage corresponding to the character indicated by the displayed effect image can be displayed. , are recognizable by the player.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD10 when the second setting suggestion effect is started. At this time, as in the case where the first setting suggestion effect is started, the effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect and the effect image showing the push button 31B are displayed, and the player can press the push button 31B. action is prompted. FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD11 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH4, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4. FIG. 9-11(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD12 when the setting suggestion effect period ends. At this time, the display result of the corresponding character in the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed may be displayed so that the player can recognize it. FIG. 9-11(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD13 in the case of stop-displaying decoration symbols of a probability variable big hit combination which is a fixed decoration symbol in response to the end of the variable display. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", the control of the big win game state is started.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, instead of the decision example shown in FIG. 9-4, for example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "probability variation", setting suggestion production may be determined feasibly. In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-4, the setting suggestion number may be determined by the ratio of the case where the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" and "probability variation" are interchanged. In this way, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", if the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than "probability variation", the jackpot type is less advantageous than the case of "probability variation" In the case of a certain "non-probability variable", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to a big hit game state. In addition, only in the case of "non-probability variation", which is the jackpot type with the lowest degree of advantage among multiple types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the operation performance that becomes the setting suggestion performance may be made executable. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

As a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage, the jackpot types may be controllable to jackpot game states with different numbers of rounds instead of the jackpot game states with "non-probability variable" or "probability variable". For example, "4R" with 4 rounds, "6R" with 6 rounds, "8R" with 8 rounds, and "10R" with 10 rounds. may be provided. In this case, as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire increases, so the player's advantage should be increased. The value notification effect may be a effect of notifying the number of prize balls that the player can acquire according to the number of rounds. Also in such a case, among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage, there is a notification that is controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage by the value notification effect. When it is performed, the set suggestive performance is set as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to a jackpot game state with a low advantage is performed. Make it executable. In addition, in accordance with the control to the jackpot game state with the highest degree of advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, the value notification effect is performed to notify that the jackpot game state is controlled to the highest degree of advantage. Only in this case, the setting suggestive effect may be executable as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

On the other hand, in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to inform the player that the jackpot game state is controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage. In this case, the set suggestive performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage is performed. may Alternatively, in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to control to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage. Only in this case, the setting suggestive effect may be executable as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

In addition, the player's advantage in a plurality of kinds of advantageous states may be varied according to whether or not any game value is awarded and the content of the game value to be awarded. For example, when the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state. Alternatively, when the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the jackpot probability in the variable probability state. The player's advantage may be varied by varying the number of consecutive wins, which is the number of times the game is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, the value that can be imparted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the game value related to the execution of the game itself. It may include part or all of executing a specific effect, such as playing a sound or displaying an image showing a two-dimensional code. The image indicating the two-dimensional code may include information that enables acquisition of predetermined digital content by photographing with a terminal device (portable terminal) possessed by the player. Values that can be imparted in the pachinko game machine 1 may include performance points different from those for executing a specific performance.

The number of executions of the operation effect is not limited to the case of "executed 5 times", which is 5 times, or the case of "executed 10 times", which is 10 times. It is acceptable if it can be set. Also in this case, when the number of executions of the operation presentation is large, the number of times of setting suggestion may be set to other than 0 at a higher rate than when the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is small, and the setting suggestion presentation may be executed. In addition, when the number of times of execution of operation effects is large, it is possible to set the setting suggestion number of times that is not determined when the number of times of execution of operation effects is small, or to increase the ratio of executing more setting suggestion effects. may

Instead of the determination example shown in FIG. 9-6, a restriction may be provided for all of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns so that the setting suggestion rendering by the same setting suggestion pattern is not executed. In addition, regardless of whether or not it is the final operation effect, and whether or not the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined, the setting suggestion pattern is determined at the common determination ratio, and then the predetermined difference is determined. When the replacement condition is established, the determined setting suggestion pattern may be replaced with another setting suggestion pattern, thereby restricting the execution of the setting suggestion performance based on the same setting suggestion pattern. Alternatively, a setting suggestion effect based on the same setting suggestion pattern may be repetitively executed for a plurality of setting suggestion patterns.

The setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be determined at different ratios depending on, for example, the number of setting suggestions, not only whether or not it is the final operation presentation. When the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and the determination of the set value of 6 may be made easier to execute. Alternatively, when the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a lower rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and it may be difficult to perform the confirmation notification that the setting value is 6. .

A setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern until a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied after being executed once. . For example, in a period in which the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, the cancellation condition is not satisfied, and after the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed once, the same setting suggestion pattern is executed. It may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by . When the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed, it is confirmed that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and it becomes possible to recognize that the set value has a high advantage for the player. , it is possible to increase the rarity of such a setting suggestion effect and improve the game interest.

Instead of the setting suggesting effect, or when an operation effect serving as a notice effect is executed together with the setting suggesting effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested. For example, as the plurality of notice effect patterns, there are notice effect patterns with different decision ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko game machine 1, and notice effect patterns that can be determined only when the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 are specific values. may be provided. More specifically, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it is possible to decide on a notice performance pattern that notifies a message of "reliability 66%", or the decision ratio of the notice performance pattern is increased. Thus, it is sufficient that the determined values in the announcement effect pattern determination table are assigned to a plurality of announcement effect patterns. By executing the operation performance as the advance notice performance and suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the advance notice performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. becomes. In addition to the operation effect that is the advance notice effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested when the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed. By executing the operation performance as the value notification performance and suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the value notification performance is performed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. becomes executable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the operation performances for giving advance notice and information, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the operation effect determination process shown in FIG. 9B, instead of steps 60AKS025 to 60AKS029, the number of times of value notification may be determined and then the number of setting suggestions may be determined. In this case, when the number of times of value notification is determined to be other than 0, the number of times of setting suggestion can be determined, and when the number of times of value notification is determined to be 0, the number of times of setting suggestion is not determined, and a setting suggestion effect is produced. may not be executed. In this way, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, it is only necessary to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect.

The setting suggesting effect is not limited to an effect suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be an effect suggesting whether or not the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed, for example. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include setting suggestion patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the setting suggestion performance is executed by the setting suggestion pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed. , the performance can be diversified and the amusement of the game can be improved.

At least part of the predetermined period or part or all of the specific period may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, while the variable display is being executed, the operation effect as the advance notice effect is executed, and the operation effect as the value notification effect and the setting suggesting effect may not be executed. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the value notification production is performed along with the execution of the big hit start production (fanfare production) and the production during the big hit (production corresponding to the first and second rounds, etc.) Alternatively, an operation effect that serves as a setting suggesting effect may be made executable. The operation effects such as the advance notice effect, the value notification effect, and the setting suggestion effect may be executable in any order. A case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed without executing the value notification effect.

In addition to the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the operation effect may be executed based on detection of a tilting operation on the stick controller 31A. When the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is executed, the effect mode in which the player's advantage is high at a higher rate than when the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed. good. For example, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is such that the ratio of determination of the operation effect using the push button 31B is 0/100 and the ratio of determination of the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is 100/100. A determined value in the pattern determination table may be assigned to multiple setting suggestion patterns.

The configuration for detecting the action of the player is not limited to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. may be possible. Further, a sensor capable of detecting any action other than the action of inputting an instruction by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. A predetermined camera may be used to analyze the result of photographing an object such as a player's hand (video motion capture), and an arbitrary action may be detected as a predetermined operation. That is, the configuration for detecting the action of the player may be any configuration that can detect the action of any object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

Various restrictions may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other amount of processing, control, or execution of an action different. It is acceptable as long as the contents are different (for example, whether to stop or reduce, the degree of reduction, etc.).

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that is advantageous to the player, for example, can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, and a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, from 1 to 6. A setting means such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value change process of FIGS. Based on the detection of the action of the player, for example, the processing of steps 60AKS045, 60AKS051, 60AKS053 shown in FIG. Action effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120, and a notification corresponding to the number of executions of the action effect, for example, the process of step 60AKS043 shown in FIG. 9-8 can be executed. In the execution pattern of the action effect by the action effect executing means, the action effect of the number of times indicated in the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period, for example, variable display A first execution pattern such as when the result is not a "jackpot" or when the set suggestion number of times is determined to be 0, and an action performance with a smaller number of execution times than indicated in the notification performance are executed within a predetermined period. , and a second execution pattern in which, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the action rendering of the remaining number of executions is executed, for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot" and the set suggestion number determination result is other than 0. , the action effect executing means, for example, as shown in FIGS. It is viable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

Equipped with advantageous notification means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 60AKS049 shown in FIG. When the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in the processing of step 60AKS024 shown in 9-2, when the notification by the advantageous notification means such as the part that executes the processing of step 60AKS025 is performed, a predetermined period of time In a specific period after the elapse, it may be possible to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the interest in the game so as to draw attention to the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As advantageous states, for example, a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-variable", and a second advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "variable", is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. 9-4, for example, when the advantageous notification means notifies that the second advantageous state is controlled. may be able to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode in the specific period at a higher rate than when the advantageous notification means reports that the control to the first advantageous state is performed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As advantageous states, for example, a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-variable", and a second advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "variable", is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. It is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states including, and the operation effect execution means is, for example, when the jackpot types shown in FIG. When the notification of the control to the first advantageous state is made by the advantageous notification means, a higher rate than the case where the notification of the control to the second advantageous state by the advantageous notification means is given in the specific period It may be possible to execute the action rendering of the rendering mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states, such as different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, the type of jackpot is either ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation''. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, only when the advantage informing means informs that the control is to be in an advantageous state with the highest degree of advantage, it is possible to execute the motion effect of the suggestive effect mode during a specific period. may As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

The action effect executing means, for example, when the set suggestion number of times shown in FIG. , which can be executed a plurality of times in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, and restricts execution of the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode in the same mode included in the plurality of modes, for example, step 60AKS027 shown in FIG. 9-2. Limiting means such as the effect control CPU 120 that determines the setting suggestion pattern at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-6 in the processing of . As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

The action effect execution means performs the action effect of the suggestion effect mode at a first timing such as the execution timing of the first suggestion and a later timing, for example the second suggestion, in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. can be executed at the second timing such as the execution timing of, for example, as shown in FIGS. may be executed at a higher rate at the second timing than at the first timing. As a result, the performance can be diversified so as to attract attention to the action performance of the suggestive performance mode, and the game interest can be improved.

The action effect executing means may be capable of executing, in a predetermined period of time, an action effect that announces control to be in an advantageous state in a suggestive effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the motion performances for giving advance notice, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 10-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 10-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a production data memory 91AK123, a ROM91AK124, a RAM91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, a voice processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main substrate 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorations. It may be an integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of the production using some or all of the plurality of production devices, such as the LED for the display and the movable members for production such as the movable body 32, is integrated on one chip. . In addition, the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132 and a built-in memory 91AK136. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in accordance with the request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As still image data, for example, character image data, which is sprite image data, is image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It would be nice if it was prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, an arbitrary character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. It is good if there is As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used for driving the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The performance data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which progress of performance is controlled.

ROM91AK124 memorize|stores a computer program, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. RAM91AK125 provides a work area to CPU91AK131 of microprocessor 91AK100 for production control. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of an internal register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and timeout occurs, it becomes a time elapse signal. generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the time-out signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM 91AK124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the performance control program. For example, in the ROM91AK124, the CPU91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 comprises a plurality of determination tables prepared for various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a determination table, and various performance control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer judgment value, end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a command group describing a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK 132 according to the order of image processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the presentation using such a display list, it is sufficient to control the electrical components for presentation in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used to control electrical parts for presentation. CPU91AK131 should just be able to read the program and data stored in RAM91AK125 in read-out time shorter than the read-out time of the program and data stored in ROM91AK124.

CPU91AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124 . The production control process includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM91AK124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores them, and various variation data read processing for reading variation data, reception processing for CPU 91AK 131 to accept input of various signals from the outside, transmission processing for CPU 91 AK 131 to output various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing good too.

The VDP 91AK 132 determines the content of image display control in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The command decoder 91AK141 decodes the command portion (command code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, a display control instruction group included in the decoded result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command group for voice control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, separates the data into video data and audio data, and outputs the data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the character image renderer 91AK145 or text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. may The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the character image designated by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132 . The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (grayscale control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided within VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from VRAM 91AK147, such as internal memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data). The frame buffer stores, for example, an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. Thus, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V-blank occurs. A V-blank occurs at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image-drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time that the drawing process is performed, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates audio signals that enable audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Also, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data that is not included in moving image data. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the like, for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, rotation angle (phase), etc. for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 10-2 shows a configuration example corresponding to the storage contents for the storage area for effect control. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data relating to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data relating to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores a performance control program and performance control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for performance control. For example, the CPU 91AK 131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK 100 performs various judgments, decisions, and settings. Table data, which are configuration data of various tables, pattern data constituting production control patterns, etc., are stored in a storage area as management data. It may be stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores a display control program and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP 91AK 132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK 100 to perform various image processing, a display process table defining the procedure for displaying effect images, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. It is good if there is. The image processing program may include a program for converting vector format image data into bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program for generating a bitmap-format text image based on text described using character codes and font data.

Storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and related data. For moving image data, image compression information including reference images and predicted images is generated by compression encoding such as motion-compensated predictive encoding using images of multiple frames that serve as original images, and multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files forming a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of moving images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is the mode and form of reproducing and displaying the moving image, including the display style and display layout of the moving image. Table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be static image data in which any character image representing a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns, persons, graphics, symbols, etc. is described in vector or bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files forming a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that table data and data files forming the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted to the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect the outline for each character used to display the text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying parameters for straight lines and curves for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string combining a plurality of character images, and arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, phrases, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the unit of is recognizable. Also, the text image data may indicate a text image with only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, and so on. It may indicate a decorative character. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when VDP 91AK 132 executes the image processing program, so it may be stored in either ROM 91AK 124 or built-in memory 91AK 136 . Thus, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the performance data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124 or the internal memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as effect data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute a text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. Note that the table data and data files that make up the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM14 stores audio related data including audio data and related data. The sound data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the sound reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the presentation by moving image display, and can reproduce and output any sound as the presentation in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Anything that does. The audio-related data stored in storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The sound output process table is used for sound control processing that can change sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as effect control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. Thus, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 10-3 shows an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table according to ready-to-win effects. In super reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, effects by moving image display using moving image data and effects by text image display using text image data can be executed. The period during which the animation display effect is executed and the period during which the text image display effect is executed may be partially or wholly the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 10-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. be done. Among them, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach-to-win A (big win)", moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, the text display process table may or may not be determined in common for different ready-to-win effect contents. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach A (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach B (losing)", it is impossible to decide. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach A (losing)", it is impossible to decide. Thus, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect is executed by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", a moving image is displayed. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. Displayable. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", a moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach-to-win B (losing)", a moving image is displayed. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Displayable. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 10-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 10-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in correspondence with the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used corresponding to the effect. FIG. 10-4(B) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used corresponding to SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include one in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a single text display period. The text display period designates the start time to start displaying and the end time to end the display for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image in the reach effect, or specified using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. may However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time of the text display period will be calculated using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. should be specified. Since the elapsed time after the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, etc., can be used even in the common ready-to-reach effect. may start to appear at different times. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information designates the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be information that designates the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses arbitrary character codes such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), and JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.) to specify the contents of the text image to be displayed. may be information specifying the The text display setting information is information that designates the display mode of the text image to be settable based on display style information, display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set by using arbitrary table data so that the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period.

FIG. 10-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 10-5(A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 10-5(A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 10-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the SP reach B reach effect is executed, at timing T10. The display of moving images is started at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 10-4(A1), as shown in FIG. 10-5(A1), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Note that the timing T08 is a timing that comes after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 10-4(A2), as shown in FIG. 10-5(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. display. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

In this manner, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a period partially or wholly common to the second text display period different from the first text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, part of the first text display period is shared with the second text display period, and part of the other period is shared with the third text display period. Thus, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is common to the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is common to the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. Thus, the first text display period may be partially included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be partially included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may be entirely included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be entirely included in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images designated by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text A text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, of the first text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed with the text image designation information The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is set so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text from timing T02 to timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image is displayed. The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods. Components can be changed. It should be noted that when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image as the display mode may be changed in all of the plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. good. When moving images using common moving image data are displayed, part or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for a plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. You can let In this way, part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image may be changed, or part or all of the text image added to one moving image may be changed. may be

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 10-4(B), as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed. display. Timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After the timing T15 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

FIG. 10-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size that is the size for displaying the text image. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field can set the alignment of characters included in the text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorations to be added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 10-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 10-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 10-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but not included in text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. Thus, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in displaying the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in a display style or display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, the third text display period included in the first text display period is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text display setting information 91AKB03 is displayed in the display style or display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. or display layout. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 common to the second text display period in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image designated by the designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the text image designation information is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image designated by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and when the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style or display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It can be displayed in the display style and display layout set by . In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by . Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting information, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by the information 91AKB13. In this way, during the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. 1 display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. During the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. Along with the display, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some of the text images can be displayed in a display mode different from that of the other text images. Further, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the third display mode, and the second display mode is displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 10-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 10-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image The text image designated by the designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. display. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this manner, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this manner, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least part of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with a plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 10-6(A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 10-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 10-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image is displayed in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, may be changeable according to the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc., even when the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at a different rate depending on whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, such as whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or one of a plurality of display colors may be determined. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK 131 even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP 91AK 132 should be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed only by changing a part of the data related to the text image contained in the text display process table. , it is possible to display various text images. If the display color of the text image is changed, other display styles may be correspondingly changeable. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image becomes easy for the player to visually recognize, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image becomes difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to As a result, it is possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's sense of discomfort in displaying the text image.

FIG. 10-7 shows an execution example of rendering in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, text images corresponding to a plurality of text display periods are displayed along with the moving image display when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed. In the reach performance of the SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", a moving image is displayed. Moving image display using data 91AKD11 is performed. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a common battle effect display is performed in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight each other. It is sufficient that the content of the effect display is common until the timing of notification. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is increased. becomes higher. Therefore, in the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach-A, even during the moving image display period in which the contents of the common performance display are displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win can be varied according to the display contents of the text image according to the text display process table. can be done.

Effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 10-7(A) is effect contents common to text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed corresponding to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, origin coordinates of (300, 30), The font family is AA_gothic, which is classified as a gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, and the display color of the text image gradually changes from #FF0040 to #4000FF. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character placement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 executes image conversion processing for displaying the text image in a display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information. good.

In the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, for example, with origin coordinates of (250, 600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho typeface, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponding to the normal character thickness, the display color of the text image is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , normal typeface corresponding to normal for the character style, left-aligned character alignment, and no character decoration.

Effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 10-7(B1) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT02 when text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600) and the font family is CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal typeface, character placement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has the same font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, character styles, and character placement have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

Effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 10-7 (B2) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Gekiatsu" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (250,600) and the font family of DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the display color of the text image is gold corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal body corresponding to normal, the character placement is in the center, and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and has font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Character styles, character alignments, and character decorations have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information are individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, if one data is changed and displayed, the first data and the Other pre-associated data may also be changeable and displayable. For example, if the display color of the text image is changed to gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration should be changed to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold.

The display color of the text image and the background display color are, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), luminance (gradation) of any one of "0" to "255". The level can be set in 256 steps. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field have the same data format as the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying character images, for example. It is good if there is The coordinates of the origin for displaying the text image can be set by combining the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a data format common to that of the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common to the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient if the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using common information with the effect image that is different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

A font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. The field data forming the fontSize field in the text display setting information corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is unique and different from the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in the effect image that is different from the text image. good too. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, and display various text images.

For example, when gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, by setting effect_gold in the textDecoration field, a glossy text image is displayed and gold is displayed around the text image. It is possible to add and display an effect image for In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 10-7(B2), when the text image designation information 91A13 designates a specific text image showing the line "Super Hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., the specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with glossiness, and the effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when an effect by moving image display using moving image data is executed, by adding an effect by text image display using text image data, the player can easily recognize the contents of the effect. This makes it easy to provide information that is different from the contents of the presentation. In this case, in a data structure in which text image data is compression-encoded and multiplexed as video data included in moving image data, in text image display using text image data reproduced by decompression and decoding, contours There is a possibility that problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. In addition, if different moving image data are prepared according to the display contents of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data tends to increase, and the image data processing load also increases. easier. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent the display quality from deteriorating in text image display, the image data processing load may increase further.

In the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, when an effect by moving image display using the moving image data read out from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, an effect by text image display using the text image data read out from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and the player can easily recognize the contents of the presentation. In addition, since text image display effects using text image data stored separately from moving image data are added, an increase in the data volume of moving image data and an increase in the processing load of image data are avoided. , it is possible to control the appropriate display that can be prevented as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information designates the display content of the text image corresponding to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK 146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for the purpose. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed according to the elapsed time. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to one moving image, it is possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and at the same time reduce data capacity and processing load. Appropriate display control is enabled so that growth is prevented.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD01 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is executed when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. The used text image can be added and displayed. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used when the moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data relating to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, for a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding text images using common data to multiple moving images and displaying them, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, while preventing increases in data volume and processing load. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the words "hot" are displayed according to the text image specification information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style or the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . The text image showing the line "Super hot" is a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is likely to be a "big hit". Any text image is acceptable. In this way, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component, such as the display mode of the specific text image, may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 10-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing the words "hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, of the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is displayed in black. During the display period, the display color is gold and character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display. As for the display style of the text image that is common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the font family is DD_mincho in the fontFamily field and the font size is 72px in the fontSize field. is set.

FIG. 10-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in black and the text decoration is not set.

FIG. 10-8(B) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the display color of the text image showing the words "hot" is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display the text image with glossiness by, for example, gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

FIG. 10-8(C) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to the text decoration effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the display color of the text image showing the line "Super hot" is gold and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the text image It is possible to display an effect image around the text image by using the display color of , shading, border display by beveling or embossing, a layer style that adds luster, or a combination of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, the effect image is added around the text image and displayed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the gold display, thereby improving the game performance with respect to the display of the text image. It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image specification information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image "character" out of the text information indicating the line "if this character wins..." to a different display color and background display of the text image from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and character style.

FIG. 10-9 shows a display example in which a portion of the text image is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions. In this display example, part of the text image "character" is displayed in white, the background color is black, and the character style is italic, while the other part of the text image is displayed in black. It is displayed so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a portion of the text image "character". Set the italic corresponding to the character style italic by the fontStyle field respectively. Also, the text display setting information 91AKB02 has black corresponding to #000000 as the display color of the text image by the color field, white corresponding to #FFFFFF as the background display color, and white corresponding to #FFFFFF by the fontStyle field. Set the normal type corresponding to the character style normal, respectively. Thus, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of the other portions, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

In the display of a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a portion displayed in a display style different from that of other portions may be changeable according to the progress of presentation by moving image display. For example, when a piece of music or dialogue is played back along with a moving image, a portion of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions, such as a specific color display or highlight display. You may let It may be possible to change the display style so that a part of the text image is faded-in or faded-out according to the progress of the music performance or speech reproduction. A portion of the text image displayed in a display style different from that of other portions is changed according to the elapsed time during the execution of an arbitrary effect, not limited to situations in which the music is played or the voice of dialogue is played along with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, a part displayed in a display style different from that of the other parts is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are set to the elapsed time, etc. Execute one of the following: display control to enable change according to the situation, or display control to enable display by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images. It may be one that does not execute the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be able to change arbitrary components, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. Instead of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any component related to the display of the text image can be changed. may For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement ratio and reduction ratio when displaying an enlarged or reduced text image, these enlargement ratios and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time It is only necessary to be able to change arbitrary components that can be set for the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio or the reduction ratio and the amount of change when the text image is changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to the common display contents, the display mode of the text image is changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 10-6(A). It is not limited to changing the display color, and any display mode such as display style or display layout may be changed. For example, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 can be displayed in the corresponding text display period instead of the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changeable to a display mode different from the display mode of the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to being stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive, is multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display the text image in a particular manner, such as by decoding. In this case, the data regarding the text image of the specific mode is included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11. Thus, the text image data includes specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in storage area 91AKM13. may

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. Alternatively, it may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 by the text image specifying information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read without using the font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may include separate field data regarding text display settings, such as textSize.

Scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only as data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to a text image that is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as word font data, may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display effects are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data will be facilitated, so designing effects for displaying text images. It is possible to reduce the burden, and to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As a second component related to the text image, the specific text image, which can change the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image at multiple timings, is not limited to the text image showing the line "Super hot" , any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, text images prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of music and text images prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of moving images may be used as specific text images. In this way, for specific text images corresponding to audio effects and display effects in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as the playback output of music and the playback display of moving images, the second component such as the display mode is set in a plurality of ways. It may be changeable with timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be the specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to the text image of the display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is highly likely to be a "jackpot", but the text image of the display content that suggests that the rate of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be the specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10").

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image. may include a case where the display color of is set. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when a preset specific text image is displayed, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings such as the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be made so that it can be displayed with an effect image added around the text image. Just do it.

When a text image is displayed in a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as coordinates in characters and display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" in the color field in the text display setting information, by transitioning different display colors for each coordinate in the character of the text image. , rainbow display should be possible. For example, at the coordinates in the character 1, the display color is changed to red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue purple to red purple, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed. At this time, considering the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes darker, we adjusted the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display, The display colors in the coordinates within the character may be changed in order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. After purplish-red, it is sufficient to return to red again and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the text image coordinates and display time range specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image. The display of the text image may be rainbow-displayed as a whole by sequentially changing different display colors according to the in-character coordinates of the text image. Alternatively, by sequentially changing the common display color for all in-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this manner, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether the player's specific action is detected, or the plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. Either can be changed. The player's specific action that enables the change of the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, or other operations of the V stick controller 31A. An arbitrary motion of tilting the rod or a motion of pressing the push button 31b may be used. Not limited to those that can detect player's actions, for example, based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target It may be possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, mechanically, electrically, electromagnetically detects the state of the detection target. Any configuration that can be detected will suffice. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

Some or all of the text image display effects using the text image data may be executed as setting suggesting effects capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is “SP reach A (big hit)”, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios according to the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the set value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to the setting of such determination ratio, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the ratio at which the effect by text image display corresponding to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. are made different according to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is displayed. The ratio of execution of effects by image display increases. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", and the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is advantageous for the player. The expectation level, which is a set value, increases.

In addition, according to the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, a limit is set such that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this way, within a range in which the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this way, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limitation as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this manner, within the range where the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to the setting-suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at a different rate depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, or whether such a condition is satisfied or not. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. A character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display is provided, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-7. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. good too. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 10-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, when a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, a glossy character image is displayed as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. A character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display is provided, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by the text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. , a character image using data relating to a common character image can be added and displayed. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the character image control means, when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, controls the character image may be changeable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple times. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 10-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data such as outline font data that can be used to display character images. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, when a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, and character images using common character image data for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image may be changed. It may be possible to add and display.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 11A shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of the screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 01AKA1, a first reserved display area 01AKB1, a second reserved display area 01AKB2, and a small pattern display area 01AKC1.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first reserved display area 01AKB1, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of first reserved memories. In the second reserved display area 01AKB2, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of second reserved memories. Thus, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first reserved display area 01AKB1, and the second reserved display area 01AKB2, active display and reserved display, which are specific displays, can be performed based on the information regarding the variable display. The pending display in the first pending display area 01AKB1 is also called "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 01AKB2 is also called "second pending display".

The first pending display area 01AKB1 can display, for example, pending displays associated with pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. The second pending display area 01AKB2 can display, for example, pending displays associated with pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. In the active display area 01AKA1, active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (digested) in the first reserved display area 01AKB1 corresponding to the start of the first special game is started, and the second special game is started. Active display corresponding to the second pending display erased (digested) in the second pending display area 01AKB1 corresponding to the start is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have the same color and pattern as the first reserved display and the second reserved display. For example, the active display is common to the first reserved display and the second reserved display. may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first reserved display and the second reserved display due to the execution of the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display so that the active display can be recognized separately from the first reserved display and the second reserved display.

At a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern display area 01AKC1 is arranged. The small pattern display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. ing. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1, variable display of small patterns is executed in correspondence with variable display of special patterns and decoration patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is reduced in size from the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and can be displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is partially or wholly common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative pattern. A reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if the identification information image showing the decoration pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decoration pattern. Since this is an image showing a number and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the performance image showing the decorative pattern. By displaying small symbols in a simple manner in the small symbol display area 01AKC1, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misunderstanding the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small patterns that serve as reduced identification information is performed, and determined small patterns that serve as display results are derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible.

FIG. 11B shows a configuration example of an effect drawing command. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect drawing commands. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that instructs color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling. The command 01AKG02 is a drawing command instructing a color blend that inverts color information. The command 01AKG03 is a drawing command for instructing color blending for blurring by changing magnification. A command 01AKG04 is a drawing command for instructing color blending for monochrome conversion. The command 01AKG05 is a drawing command instructing color blending for blurring by rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command instructing to change the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing commands for effects may be prepared as one drawing command, or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a group of commands for drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string combining a plurality of commands for the VDP 91AK132. The VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for effect may be composed of a combination of command groups for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculations. For example, a drawing command instructing color blending may function as a drawing command for each effect by setting a parameter according to the effect to be applied. For example, the internal register of the VDP91AK132 stores control data specifying the operation target included in the display list, numeric data specifying parameters, and other register values. By storing the register value according to the execution command, Drawing according to the display list is started.

When performing color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, for example, a reduced image is generated by bilinear interpolation method texture mapping for image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using a plurality of reduced images generated in this way, a combined reduced image is generated by executing a synthesis process based on color blending, such as alpha blending. After that, by performing enlargement processing of the synthesized reduced image, an image generated by changing color information included in image data can be drawn so as to obtain an image subjected to blurring processing.

When performing color blending to invert color information in response to command 01AKG02, for example, the maximum value (for example, 255) and , and perform difference calculation processing. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", then 255-80=175 is obtained, thereby inverting the color information. By executing the same difference calculation process for the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information contained in the image data is converted to an image in which the color information is inverted. can be changed to render the generated image.

In response to command 01AKG03, when executing color blending for blurring by changing magnification, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as image enlargement ratios and reduction ratios are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. A plurality of enlarged or reduced images generated in this manner and an image (original image) corresponding to the original image data are used to perform synthesis processing by color blending, such as alpha blending, to perform blur processing. The image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that the image is obtained by changing the color information included in the image data.

When executing color blending for monochrome conversion in response to command 01AKG04, monochrome conversion arithmetic processing is executed for each pixel with respect to RGB values, which are color information of each pixel (one pixel) indicated by image data, for example. do. In the monochrome conversion arithmetic processing, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB values into the arithmetic expression for color tone conversion. By executing the monochrome conversion arithmetic processing in this way, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain an image subjected to monochrome conversion.

When color blending for blurring by rotation is executed in response to command 01AKG05, a plurality of rotated images are generated by, for example, rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, for an image with a rotation angle of 0°, two types of rotated images are generated, such as an image with a rotation angle of 2° and an image with a rotation angle of 4°. An image that has undergone blurring processing by executing synthesis processing using color blending, such as alpha blending, using a plurality of rotated images generated in this way and an image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. An image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to the command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed by, for example, coordinate value conversion processing for the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, position information for drawing an image, such as UV coordinate values, is changed according to an offset amount set as a parameter. UV coordinate values are given as texture coordinate attribute values when mapping a texture onto an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so as to obtain an image with a different texture arrangement.

In this way, the drawing commands for effect may include commands such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that enable drawing of an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data. Also, the effect drawing command may include a command, such as command 01AKG06, that enables drawing of an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data. In addition, the effect drawing command may include a command that enables drawing of an image generated by changing arbitrary attribute information related to image data.

Unlike these drawing commands for effects, the CPU 91AK 131 can also generate drawing commands for normal display. The drawing command for normal display executes processing for drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing color information or the like included in the image data by not executing synthesis processing by color blending or the like.

FIG. 11C shows an example of screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn divided into a plurality of display layers. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 11-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Among them, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer having the highest display priority, and draws an effect image showing a small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 so that it can be displayed. The layer 01AKL2 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL1, and draws an effect image corresponding to the suspended display and the active display so as to be displayable. Also, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing a pedestal below the active display so that it can be displayed. The layer 01AKL3 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL2, and draws an effect image or the like used for a chance-up effect of increasing the chance during reach. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays effects images and the like showing decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Draw possible. A layer 01AKL5 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image that is a background image so that it can be displayed.

A display layer in which a plurality of effect images are arranged is designated by display priority information or the like included in the display list, for example. In the display list, the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 is designated as the first drawing target, and then the effect images placed on the respective display layers are designated as drawing targets in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. good too. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value, which is the depth value used when superimposing and drawing the respective effect images. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value is arranged on the nearer side (front side) in the Z axis direction than a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value, and the display priority of the image is higher. You can do it like this.

When the VDP 91AK132 writes the image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, the VDP 91AK132 may determine the display priority by comparing the Z values. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image with a small Z value is written in the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image with a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with the small value as the Z value has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with the large value as the Z value. It can be arranged on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value. It can be arranged on the back side (rear side) as seen. Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be a reverse relationship, and a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower Z value than a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the drawing process of the effect image corresponding to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including the plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after synthesizing the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 so as to be superimposed as a plurality of display layers with different display priorities.

Of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. On layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, effect images can be drawn and displayed by drawing processing different from the effect images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 11-4 is a flow chart showing an example of effect drawing synthesis processing executed by the VDP 91AK 132. FIG. The effect drawing synthesizing process is executed, for example, when a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred based on the instruction code decoded by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing/synthesizing process is started, image data to be subjected to the effect process is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP 91AK132, image data to be processed is read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, and stored in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147 for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM 91AK 147. It should be memorized. Image data to be subjected to effect processing is specified by a drawing command as image data representing an image to be drawn on one of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, among a plurality of display layers.

Thereafter, effect color blending is executed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP 91AK132 executes, for example, one of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command using some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. color blend according to the In the case of command 01AKG06, coordinate value conversion processing may be executed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the low-priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image for which effect color blending has been executed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. For example, the VDP 91AK132 is drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by a drawing command by some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. It suffices to store the images in the screen display frame buffer while synthesizing them according to the display priority. As a result, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing color blend for effect. can.

After step 01AKS03, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the display layer of high priority (step 01AKS04). For example, the VDP 91AK132 reads image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and draws it in a frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. An image in the low-priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK 123 and the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and uses the VRAM 91AK 147 for screen display. It can be transferred to the frame buffer and stored. At this time, some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, and draw on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is specified by the drawing command as image data representing an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer among the plurality of display layers. As a result, an image drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn for screen display without executing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data. can be done.

In this way, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute drawing processing for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 using image data stored in predetermined areas of the effect data memory 91AK 123 and VRAM 91AK 147 . In addition, by executing the effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, an image drawn on one of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. On the other hand, an image drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn corresponding to the image data.

When a display list containing drawing commands for normal display but not drawing commands for effect is transferred, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute normal drawing composition processing different from effect drawing composition processing. In the normal drawing synthesis process, the data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and stores it in the VRAM 91AK 147. Then, the data is transferred to the frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, and draw on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. In this case, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are changed without color blending for effect. can be drawn for screen display without

FIG. 11-5 shows an execution example of image processing by effect drawing synthesis processing. In this case, in the display list containing the drawing commands for effects, the image data to be subjected to effect processing are the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on the layer The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL4 and the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 are designated respectively. When the VDP 91AK 132 reads these image data in step 91AKS 01 of the effect drawing synthesis process, they are temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF 01 provided in the work area of the VRAM 91AK 147 or the like. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11A1, image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL3, image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL4, and effect image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5 are obtained. The image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP 91AK 132 performs effect color blending on the image data stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing synthesis process. For example, when a command 01AKG04 designates a color blend for monochrome conversion as an effect drawing command, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. As a result, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 11-5(A2). The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL4 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 11-5(A2). The image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 11-5(A2).

After that, the VDP 91AK 132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the low-priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of the effect drawing synthesis processing. For example, the image data read from the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, overwriting of image data or hidden surface removal may be executed according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 11-5(A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. memorize with The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is read second and superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be combined. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is read third, and superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02.

Then, the VDP 91AKD 132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the high-priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis processing. At this time, of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is first designated as the image data to be drawn, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list. , and the image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is specified next. The VDP 91AK 132 writes and stores the image data in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 each time it reads the image data. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is read first, and superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. Finally, the image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is read and superimposed on the image data 01AKD02 and 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be combined.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 are converted into the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 in which the color information is changed by color blending for effect, and the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 after the conversion are given priority for display. The data are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order according to the frequency. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not performing color blending for effect. Therefore, 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are drawn by specific drawing processing such as color blending for effects, and display various images for effects such as background images, effect images showing decorative patterns, and effect images for increasing chances during reach. It is possible. On the other hand, 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, are drawn by normal drawing processing that does not perform color blending for effects. A related predetermined image can be displayed.

FIG. 11-6 shows an example of image display by execution of effect drawing synthesis processing. When the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred, the VDP 91AK 132 can display the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing the effect drawing synthesizing process. .

FIG. 11-6A shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including command 01AKG04 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, an effect image drawn by monochrome conversion arithmetic processing among color blends for effect is displayed in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data. As a result, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, are drawn by monochrome conversion arithmetic processing for drawing with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data as the specific drawing processing. A production image can be displayed. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, can be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by normal drawing processing, and can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game.

FIG. 11-6(B) shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list containing command 01AKG02 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, it is possible to display an image for effect drawn by difference calculation processing among color blends for effect in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is. The difference calculation process is a process for drawing by converting the value of color information included in the image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as specific drawing processing, drawing is performed by difference calculation processing for converting the value of color information included in the image data and drawing, and an effect image is drawn. can be displayed. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without converting the values of color information included in the image data by normal drawing processing.

In addition, when a display list including the command 01AKG01 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, perform color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by normal drawing processing, and display a predetermined image regarding the progress of the game.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, image data is processed by combining color blending for blurring by changing magnification as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display a rendering image drawn by changing the color information contained in the . In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by the normal drawing process, so that a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, perform color blending for blurring due to rotation as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the included color information. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by normal drawing processing, and display a predetermined image regarding the progress of the game.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, image data is converted by coordinate value conversion processing for changing the offset amount of the image position as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to . In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the position information or the like corresponding to the image data by the normal drawing process, and display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

By using these drawing commands for effects, it is possible to create an effect image drawn by changing the color information contained in the image data, or an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, on a specific layer. can be displayed. As a result, even an effect image drawn using common image data can be drawn by changing color information or position information by making it possible to execute different image processing according to the effect drawing command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing, and to execute various display effects to improve the amusement of the game.

FIG. 11-7(A) shows a setting example of the reliability of the big hit according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. The big hit reliability for each ready-to-win effect is the ratio of the cases where the variable display result is "big win" and the game is controlled to the big win game state among the cases where each ready-to-win effect is executed. In this setting example, the reliability of the big hit is set to be different according to a plurality of types of reach effects such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B, which are super reach. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, by assigning a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining the variable display pattern, the ratio of the variable display result to be a "big hit" is set differently according to multiple types of ready-to-win effects. It is good if there is.

SP reach A1-A3 is the reach production of super reach whose big hit reliability is lower than SP reach B, and is also called "weak SP reach". The SP reach B is a reach performance of a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the SP reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach". For example, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP reach B is 80%. is. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect of SP reach A1 is executed, the variable display result is "big hit" about once out of five times. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed, the variable display result is "big hit" about four times out of five times. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which commonality can be partially recognized in the case of the SP reach-to-reach A1 to A3. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may reproduce and display a common moving image as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may be animated with a common character image. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which the difference between the SP reach-B and the SP reach-A1 to A3 can be recognized. For example, for SP reach B, a moving image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be reproduced and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, SP reach B may be animated with a character image different from SP reach A1 to A3. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which one of the cases of SP reach A1 to A3 can recognize the difference from other cases. For example, SP reach A1 to A3 may reproduce and display different moving images as background images. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may be animation-displayed with different character images. In addition, the presentation mode in which the difference can be recognized is arbitrary display on the screen of the image display device 5, arbitrary sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and arbitrary display using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. light emission, any action using the movable member for presentation, or a combination of some or all of these.

The execution of a super reach effect, such as SP reach A1 to A3, includes the execution of a drawing effect by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command. As the drawing effect, it may be possible to select and execute one of a plurality of types of display effects capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command. As a drawing effect, the image drawn in response to the drawing command for effect is not displayed, but even if it is possible to display the image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the drawing command for effect good. When the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed, even if it includes the case of executing the display of the image drawn in response to only the drawing command for normal display without executing a specific drawing effect good.

FIG. 11-7(B) shows a setting example of the content of drawing effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as a plurality of drawing effect patterns. Some or all of the drawing effect contents are different according to these plurality of drawing effect patterns. The contents of the drawing effect include presence/absence and type of drawing effect by effect display, and presence/absence of drawing effect by strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include effect display or strobe display is also called a normal drawing effect. A drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is also called a specific drawing effect.

Effect display is effect display in which color information included in image data is changed and an image is drawn when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect draws and displays an effect image that has undergone monochrome conversion using command 01AKG04 among the effect drawing commands. In the color information inversion effect, command 02 among the effect drawing commands is used to draw and display an effect image in which color information is inverted. In this way, the effect display may be any effect image that is rendered by changing the color information included in the image data. For the effect display, for example, the command 01AKG06 among the effect drawing commands may be used to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data.

Strobe display is an effect display in which an image drawn using image data and a single-color (for example, black or white) image set differently from the image data are alternately and repeatedly displayed every predetermined number of frames. is. Strobe display may be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, strobe display may not be performed for images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, strobe display may be performed within the range of the image drawn on the specific layer, but may be restricted as a limit such that it is not performed within the range of the image drawn on the special layer. A pause display may be performed along with the strobe display. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect due to the display of the image is paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. It should be noted that, when strobe display is not executed, temporary stop display may be performed.

FIG. 11-8 shows an example of determination of drawing effect patterns. For example, in the production control process processing of step S76, when the variable display start setting processing is executed in step S171, a plurality of drawing It suffices if one of the production patterns can be determined. When the variable display pattern corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of super reach is specified, the CPU 91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing effect pattern, and based on the random value, according to the variable display result and the content of the ready-to-win effect, A drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in Fig. 11-8, when the variable display result is "Loss", if the content of reach effect is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it is drawn at a rate of 60% (= 60/100) Effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and 5% (=5 /100), drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 5% = (5/100). be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", if the content of reach effect is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100). , the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (=15/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100). Drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100), and drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (=30/100). Due to such a determined ratio, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 have different ratios of control to the big win game state when the variable display result is "big hit".

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern in which a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect using effect display or strobe display, is not executed. On the other hand, drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns for executing a specific drawing effect by one or both of effect display and strobe display. Then, when the ready-to-win effect content is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is "big win", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is higher than when the variable display result is "losing". The ratio of determination to the drawing effect pattern other than . Therefore, when the content of the reach effect is any of the SP reach A1 to A3, when the specific drawing effect, which is the drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display, is executed, the specific drawing effect is not executed. , the variable display result becomes "big win" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state increases. Further, the drawing performance patterns other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 are set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, only the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is provided so as not to determine anything other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. When the content of the ready-to-win performance is SP ready-to-win B, super-ready-to-win ready-to-win performance of “strong SP ready-to-win” with higher reliability of big win than SP ready-to-win A1 to A3 is executed. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach effect of super reach, which has a high hit reliability, and there is a risk of reducing the interest in the game. be. Therefore, within the range where the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-reach B, a limitation is provided as a limit that the specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being disturbed with respect to the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, which has a high degree of reliability for big hits, and to appropriately improve the amusement of the game.

When the content of the ready-to-win effect is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine any of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 at different ratios according to the variable display result. . When the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, a super ready-to-win ready-to-win performance of “weak SP ready-to-win” with a lower reliability of big win than in the case of SP ready-to-win B is executed. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance is executed by effect display or strobe display, the variable display result becomes "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state increases. In this way, when the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, execution of the specific drawing performance increases the ratio of control to the big win game state, so super ready-to-win with low reliability of big win. Even with the ready-to-win effect, the execution of the specific drawing effect increases the expectation of the player and appropriately enhances the interest in the game.

It should be noted that even when the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, it may be possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is the SP ready-to-win effect B, it is possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the content of the ready-to-reach effect is the SP reachable effects A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the ready-to-win effect content is SP reach-B, the specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the ready-to-win effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. may be set as a limit.

FIG. 11-9(A) shows an effect execution period in variable display of super reach. When variable display of super reach is performed, the period from the start of variable display to the end of variable display can be divided into a plurality of effect execution periods such as effect execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display to the start of execution of the ready-to-win effect after the ready-to-win game is established. The performance execution period D1 is a period from the start of the ready-to-win performance execution period in which the ready-to-win performance as super ready-to-win performance is executed to the start of the chance-up performance execution period in which the chance-up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result-informing performance execution period in which the result-informing performance can be executed after the chance-up performance execution period ends. The result notification effect may be any effect as long as it notifies the effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the ready-to-win effect that becomes super reach. The effect execution period D3 is a period from the start of the result notification effect execution period to the end thereof. The effect execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification effect execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 11-9(B) shows an effect control example 02AKC01 in each effect execution period. Among the plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is performed. become viable. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, since the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed even in the effect execution period D2 without executing the specific drawing effect SPE.

Among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D0 from the start of variable display to the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, regardless of whether it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. For example, in the effect execution period D0, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, if it is possible to execute the light emitting effect using the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the output of BGM and sound effects good. In addition, during the effect execution period D0, when the decorative design is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, or when the "left", "middle" and "right" ', the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop displaying the decorative patterns that constitute the pseudo consecutive chances, and the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are turned on in response to BGM and sound effect output. It may be possible to execute a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire effect execution period D0, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, and the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs emit light in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display. It may be possible to perform a production.

Among the effect execution periods D1 to D4 in which the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed during the execution of the variable display, in the effect execution period D1 following the effect execution period D0, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. In the effect execution period D2 after the effect execution period D1, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR based on the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, an image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing effect SPE by the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, for example, in the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed. Note that even when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, for example, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

In the effect execution period D3 and the effect execution period D4 after the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR regardless of whether it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. becomes viable. In the effect execution period D3, as in the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01. may be When the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is performed in the normal drawing in the effect execution period D4 for notifying fixed decoration patterns, etc., which are the result of variable display. It suffices to return to the execution of the effect NOR. Also, the specific drawing effect SPE may be executable in all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Execution of the specific drawing performance SPE can be started based on the determination result that the ready-to-win performance of super-ready-to-win is executed as a determination result at the time of start winning before the variable display for executing the ready-to-win performance of super-to-win. You may do so. Even if the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, for example, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, as in the case of executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2 Images drawn by specific drawing processing can be displayed. For example, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

Among a plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed even in a period other than the performance execution period D0, a light emission performance using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs is performed. It is viable. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, control is performed so that the light emitting effect is not executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs is turned off so that the light emitting effect is not executed. In this way, when the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed, the lighting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the effect execution period during which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in which the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed, the light emitting effect by the light emission of the light emitting member can be executed, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is enabled. In the range of the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying is executed, there is a limitation as a limit that the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing the light emission effect, the player can easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display can improve amusement in the game.

Note that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, the restriction is not limited to not executing the light emitting effect by light emission of the light emitting member, and for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. A limitation may be provided to the effect mode of the light emitting effect, such as reducing the effect amount of the light emitting effect more than in the case of using the light emitting effect. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect amount is reduced by reducing the light emission amount (luminance) of the light emitting member in the light emission effect compared to when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is limited by reducing the number of light emitting members capable of emitting light in the light emitting effect as compared to when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the emission color used in the light emission effect (e.g., monochromatic light emission) compared to when the normal drawing process NOR is executed. A limit may be set as follows.

FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13 show execution examples of reach effects and drawing effects. FIG. 11-10 shows an effect execution example in the case where the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where the ready-to-win effect of super reach is executed. FIG. 11-11 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIGS. 11-12 show an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIGS. 11-13 show an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 11-10(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM01 in the case where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win is established. At this time, in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the common decorative patterns corresponding to the number "7" are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) to establish a ready-to-win state. , reach production of normal reach is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, it is possible to appropriately execute the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect corresponding to the effect execution period D0. For example, it is only necessary to be able to execute a light emitting effect using light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the establishment of reach to the development of super reach.

FIG. 11-10(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM02 in the case where the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is changed to the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win in response to the start of the effect execution period D1. FIGS. 11-10(C) and 11-10(D) show production execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win progresses in the production execution period D1. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, in response to the effect execution period D1, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect can be executed. Do not run SPE.

FIG. 11-10(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM05 in the case where the during-reach chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2. FIG. 11-10(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM06 when the ready-to-win effect is executed after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 11-10(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification effect is executed in the effect execution period D3. At this time, as a ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, a ready-to-win effect with different effect contents depending on the result of variable display is executed. Then, the fixed decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by shaking display or the like. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM07, corresponding to the effect execution period D3, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. don't run

FIG. 11-10(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM08 in the case where the fixed notification of the variable display result is executed in the effect execution period D4. At this time, as the ready-to-win performance of super-ready to finish, the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed by a complete stop display. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM08, in response to the effect execution period D4, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. don't run

FIG. 11-11(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM11 when the in-reach chance-up effect is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the pause display may be started in response to drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in the VRAM 91AK147 and stored reusably. Further, in response to execution of the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display, control is performed so as not to execute the light emission effect.

FIG. 11-11(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM12 in the case of executing strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM11. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM12, a black image as a whole is drawn and displayed as a single-color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 11-11(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM13 in the case of executing the effect display of temporary stop display during strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM12. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM13, by repeating the pause display started in effect execution example 02AKM11, it is sufficient that the pause display can be executed during strobe display. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, an image read out from the copy area of the VRAM 91AK147 may be drawn to repeatedly display an image pause similar to the effect execution example 02AKM11.

FIG. 11-11(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM14 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM12 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM13. FIG. 11-11(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM15 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM14. FIG. 11-11(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM16 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM15. FIG. 11-11(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM17 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM16. FIG. 11-11(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM18 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM17. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly switching between an image drawn using the image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, it is possible to perform temporary stop display as well as strobe display. . After the stroboscope display of effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed and control is performed to execute the light emission effect.

Such strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data by using an image with settings different from the image data according to a drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP 91AK132. As a result, even if the image for effect is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display can be executed in accordance with the drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR does not affect the player. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data amount of image data and execute various display effects to improve the amusement of the game.

In FIG. 11-12(A), corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2, when the chance-up effect during reach is executed, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. This shows an effect execution example 02AKM21. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. are doing.

FIG. 11-12(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM22 in the case of executing strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM22, as in effect execution example 02AKM12, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image that is entirely black as a single-color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 11-12(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM23 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM22, a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 during execution of the chance-up effect during reach. is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM23, it is sufficient if the in-reach chance-up effect started in the effect execution example 02AKM21 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific rendering effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, as in the effect execution example 02AKM05, by displaying the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time, The temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 11-12(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM24 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM22 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM23. FIG. 11-12(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM25 when the ready-to-win effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM24. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. are doing.

FIG. 11-12(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM26 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 11-12(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM27 when the ready-to-win effect after the effect execution example 02AKM25 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM26. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM25 can be continued. As a ready-to-reach effect during strobe display, pause display may be executed, or pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE by the color information conversion effect. FIG. 11-12(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM27. In this way, alternately and repeatedly switching between an image obtained by monochrome conversion, which is drawn by reducing the number of colors in the color information by monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. By displaying with , it is possible to execute the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect together with the stroboscopic display.

Effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, uses an image drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data in accordance with the drawing command for effect transferred from the CPU 91AK 131 to the VDP 91AK 132. It can be executed regardless of the data. As a result, even if the image for effect is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed in accordance with the effect drawing command. Since the impression given to the player can be varied, it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing and execute various display performances to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the display image, and the display effect can be achieved while preventing the data amount of the image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the game and improve the amusement of the game.

In FIG. 11-13(A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is executed by the color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12. It shows an effect execution example 02AKM31. Compared to the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of color information by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is displayed.

FIG. 11-13(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM32 in the case of executing strobe display subsequent to the effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM32, as in effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 serving as specific layers draw and display an image that is entirely black as a single-color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 11-13(C) is an effect execution example in which a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a color information reversal effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 during the execution of the chance-up effect during reaching, following the effect execution example 02AKM32. 02AKM33 is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM33, it is sufficient if the in-reach chance-up effect started in the effect execution example 02AKM31 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information reversal effect, even when strobe display is executed, an image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the effect execution example 02AKM05. , the pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 11-13(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM34 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM32 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM33. FIG. 11-13(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM35 when the ready-to-win effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM34. Compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of color information by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is displayed.

FIG. 11-13(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM36 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 11-13(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM37 when the ready-to-win effect after the effect execution example 02AKM35 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM36. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win effect executed in effect execution example 02AKM35 can be continued. It should be noted that pause display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE by color information conversion effect. FIG. 11-13(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM38 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, the image is alternately and repeatedly switched between an image obtained by inverting color information drawn by converting the value of color information by difference calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. By displaying it, it is possible to perform a specific drawing effect SPE by a color information reversal effect together with strobe display.

The effect display, which is the color information reversal effect, uses an image drawn by converting the value of color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for effect transferred from the CPU 91AK 131 to the VDP 91AK 132, and uses dedicated image data. It can be executed regardless of As a result, even for an effect image drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information reversing effect can be executed in accordance with the effect drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR and the normal drawing effect NOR are realized. can give different impressions to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing and execute various display performances to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by combining effect display, which is a color information reversal effect, and strobe display, the player can easily recognize the change in color of the displayed image, thereby preventing an increase in the amount of image data while displaying the image. It is possible to enhance the impression of the performance and improve the amusement of the game.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity of the display effect that is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the content of ready-to-win production is any one of SP ready-to-reach A1 to A3, a super-ready-to-win ready-to-win production of “weak SP ready-to-win” with a lower reliability level than the case of SP ready-to-B is executed. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of incongruity in a display effect not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state increases, so that the player's expectations can be heightened and the amusement of the game can be appropriately improved.

The invention relating to the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features related to the feature parts 01AK and 02AK. It may be one provided with a part.

The strobe display has been described as being performed by alternately and repeatedly switching between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such strobe display, there may be a case where a single-color image is partially or entirely replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when inserting and displaying a performance image that is a character image as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes "big win" and is controlled to a big win game state, as compared with the case where a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content of the drawing effect pattern and the determination ratio may be set so that the ratio is high.

It has been explained that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display portion of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmittance is provided on the front side (front side) of part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5 . Also, a light emitting member such as a light guide plate LED is provided near the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light guide plate. Then, a light-emitting display effect for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. In the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern etc., it is sufficient if the light emitting display effect can be executed based on the determination result of the light emitting display effect pattern. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like, control may be performed so that the light emission display effect is not executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing a button light emitting portion mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern etc., it is sufficient if the button light emitting effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emitting effect pattern. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like, control may be performed so that the button light emitting effect is not executed.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting as to whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, a layer 01AKL2 that draws an effect image corresponding to a suspended display or an active display so as to be displayable may be included in the specific layer instead of the special layer. In the setting that the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect images corresponding to the suspended display and the active display are drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, and the color information, etc. may be changed. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect is executed, it is sufficient if the effect image corresponding to the suspended display or the active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling the monochrome display of such a suspended display and active display, when it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of a specific display related to variable display, such as a suspended display and an active display, a specific drawing effect SPE , the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. The display color of the specific display should be different according to the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state. When the change effect includes a success pattern of changing the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern of not changing the display color of the specific display, the change effect of the success pattern is executed during execution of the specific drawing effect SPE, Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the display color of the specific display changes to the specific color, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. At the timing when the pending display is displayed, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the pending display are performed, the success pattern changing effect is executed, and the display color of the active display is changed. Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the color changes to the specific color, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer may be included that draws a displayable effect image or the like indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. For example, in the direction display layer, as an operation promotion effect for left-handed or right-handed effects, a performance image that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area or the right game area when the shooting promotion effect is executed is displayed. It is sufficient if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko game machine 1, a game can be played by shooting game balls as game media, and a first route and a second route are provided as movement routes along which the game balls can flow. The first path may be a right-handed path that is the right side of the game area, and the second path may be a left-handed area of the game area. In the first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, the first promotion image for prompting the shooting of the game medium toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. If it is Further, when the second state is advantageous for the game ball to flow down the second path, the second promotion image prompting the shooting of the game medium toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, since the direction display layer is included in the special layer, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the effect image prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. The image that prompts the shooting of the game medium can be drawn and displayed by normal rendering processing instead of the specific rendering processing, so that the visibility of the image that prompts the shooting of the game media is appropriately ensured, and various display effects are executed. As a result, the game interest can be improved.

As the operation-promoting effect, it may be possible to draw and display a effect image that indicates that the effect output amount can be changed, such as a part or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. As a display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer may be included that draws an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect so that it can be displayed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a warning display layer for drawing a warning image or the like for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the warning display layer, various sensors connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a grand prize entrance door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor. When it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball by the start switch, the count switch, etc., a warning image corresponding to the error that occurred is drawn and displayed. If possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the warning The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the warning image for reporting the occurrence of an abnormality may be a predetermined image related to the game, as long as it can be drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process. The warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality can be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing instead of a specific drawing process. You can run it to improve your gaming interest. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which no light emitting effect is executed, the light emitting member may be caused to emit light to notify the abnormality light emission. In this way, notification regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer that draws an effect image in the setting suggestion effect so as to be displayable may be included. For example, the suggestion display layer may draw and display setting suggestion images determined at different ratios according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the pachinko game machine 1, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be set. It suffices if it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different determination ratios. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggesting images at different ratios depending on the setting value, draw the selected setting suggesting image on the suggestive display layer, and display the selected setting suggesting image. In this way, by including the suggestive display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. An image suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be drawn and displayed on a special layer by normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing, so that images suggesting set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be displayed. It is possible to enhance amusement in a game by executing various display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility. Alternatively, the suggestive display layer may be included in the specific layer instead of the special layer. In this way, by including the suggestive display layer in the specific layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestive display layer can be displayed in the special layer. The display layer may display an image drawn by a specific drawing process. The image suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be drawn and displayed in the specific layer by the specific drawing process, thereby diversifying the display of the image suggesting the setting value with different advantages for the player. , can improve the game interest.

At least part of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, it is possible to control an assist time (also called AT), which is a notification period during which navigation notification for notifying a stop order that is advantageous to a player according to an internal lottery result can be executed. As the navigation notification, an effect image may be displayed on the screen of the image display device to notify the stopping order in an identifiable manner. In this case, a display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that renders a displayable effect image used for navigation notification. For example, in the notification display layer, when notifying the order to stop the variable display by the left, middle and right reels, if it is possible to draw and display a stop order image indicating the order of the stop operation by the stop switch on the notification display layer good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Visibility of the image notifying the operation mode by drawing and displaying the image notifying the operation mode when stopping the variable display in the slot machine in the special layer by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process. can be appropriately ensured, various display performances can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 01AK)
The game machine related to the characteristic part 01AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, such as the pachinko game machine 1. An image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, for example, the image processing means performs normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to drawing commands for normal display, for example, drawing corresponding to image data, Specific drawing processing such as drawing processing corresponding to drawing commands for effects, for example, drawing by changing color information included in at least image data, can be executed. An image in each layer can be displayed, and the plurality of layers includes specific layers such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers having a higher priority than the specific layers, such as layers AKL01 and AKL02. In steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, the specific layer is drawn by a specific drawing process to display an image for effect. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the amount of data, to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image, and to make it possible to execute a variety of display effects, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The specific drawing process may be drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information contained in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific rendering process may be rendered by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as color information reversal. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, like production control example 02AKC01, a plurality of periods including a first period in which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as production execution period D1, and a second period in which specific drawing processing is executed, such as production execution period D2. Of these, the light emitting means can emit light during the first period, and the light emitting means may not emit light during the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, among a plurality of periods including a first period in which the specific drawing process is not executed, such as the effect execution period D1, and a second period in which the specific drawing process is executed, such as the effect execution period D2, light is emitted during the first period. It is possible to cause the means to emit light in the normal mode, and in the second period the light emission of the light emitting means may be more restricted than in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a set value change process S6A, for example, which can be set to one of a plurality of set values such as values from 1 to 6, which has different advantages for the player, Suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying in a specific mode, for example, setting suggestion effect such as effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by a specific drawing process. It is also possible not to display the image that is displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Setting means, such as the CPU 103 for executing the setting value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, are provided. Suggestion regarding means setting is performed by display in a specific mode, for example, setting suggestion effect such as effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and the image displayed by setting suggestion effect is drawn by specific drawing processing. It may be possible to display an image. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific drawing effect by pausing and displaying an image, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in rendering execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, the specific layer may alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute effects by means of various displays, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

For example, variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to perform variable display of a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image. For example, as shown in FIG. It can be drawn and displayed, and the reduced identification information image can be drawn and displayed by normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by enabling various display effects to be executed while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 02AK)
The game machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, such as the pachinko game machine 1. Equipped with an image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, and specific effects such as super ready-to-win effects suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state. can be executed during variable display, and the effect pattern of the specific effect differs in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state, for example, a first pattern such as drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and a second pattern such as drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. At least in the first period, such as the effect execution period D1, among the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing effect It is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to the drawing command of , and among the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, the second period, such as the effect execution period D2, after the first period, for example In the second period, an image drawn by normal drawing processing can be displayed in the case of the first pattern, and in the case of the second pattern, specific drawing processing such as drawing processing according to a drawing command during a specific drawing effect is performed. It is possible to display an image drawn by As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to appropriately raise the player's sense of expectation, thereby enhancing the interest in the game while enabling the execution of various display effects.

The specific drawing process may be drawn with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute effects by means of various displays, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The specific rendering process may be rendered by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as reversing color information. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute effects by means of various displays, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

For example, as in effect control example 02AKC01, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect by the light emitting means in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emission effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, the light emission effect by the light emitting means can be executed in a normal mode, and in response to the display of the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect, The lighting performance may be restricted more than the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a set value change process S6A, for example, which can be set to one of a plurality of set values such as values from 1 to 6, which has different advantages for the player, Suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying in a specific mode, for example, setting suggestion effect such as effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by a specific drawing process. It is also possible not to display the image that is displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 for executing a set value change process S6A, which can be set to one of a plurality of set values such as values from 1 to 6 with different advantages for the player. Suggestion regarding means setting is performed by display in a specific mode, for example, setting suggestion effect such as effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and an image displayed by setting suggestion effect is drawn by specific drawing processing. It may be possible to display an image. As a result, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by enabling various display effects to be executed while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect of pausing and displaying an image in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute effects by means of various displays, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using the image data and a monochromatic image in the case of the second pattern, such as production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute effects by means of various displays, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

For example, variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to perform variable display of a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image. For example, as shown in FIG. It can be drawn and displayed, and the reduced identification information image can be drawn and displayed by normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK and the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect in a suggestive effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component, or add a character image using data related to a common character image to the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image In the specific layer, the specific drawing process is used to draw the effect image, and the special layer, which has a higher priority than the specific layer, is drawn by the normal drawing process, It may be possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, and in the second period after the first period, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the case of the first pattern, It may be possible to display an image drawn by the specific drawing process in the case of the second pattern in which the rate of control to be in an advantageous state is different from that of the first pattern.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 5... Image display device 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 100... Game control microcomputer 120... Effect control CPU
91AK100 ... Production control microprocessor 91AK131 ... CPU
91AK132 … VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a game,
a storage means for storing image data;
and image processing means capable of executing drawing processing using image data,
The image processing means is
normal drawing processing for drawing corresponding to image data;
a specific drawing process for changing and drawing at least the color information included in the image data,
The specific drawing process is a process of changing color information of a plurality of types of effect images displayed in a specific layer included in a plurality of layers with different priorities,
A specific effect suggesting that the player is controlled in an advantageous state can be executed during the variable display,
As the specific effect, a first specific effect with a high degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, or a second specific effect with a low degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state can be executed,
The effect pattern of the second specific effect includes a first pattern and a second pattern with different expectations of being controlled to the advantageous state,
An image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed with the first pattern and the second pattern in at least a first period of the effect period during which the second specific effect is executed,
In a second period of the effect period in which the second specific effect is executed, which is later than the first period , the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the case of the first pattern, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the case of the second pattern ;
execution of the specific drawing process is restricted in response to the execution of the first specific effect;
When the specific drawing process is executed in response to the execution of the second specific effect, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the specific drawing process is not executed,
As the second specific effect, it is possible to execute one of a plurality of types of predetermined effects with different expectations of being controlled to the advantageous state,
The common specific drawing process can be executed in response to any of the plurality of types of predetermined effects being executed,
Further comprising a light emitting means capable of executing a light emitting effect corresponding to the specific drawing process,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images